Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in present tense. Example: You / We / They (be) are happy. Example: I (be) am happy.

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in present tense. Example: You / We / They (be) are happy. Example: I (be) am happy."

Transcription

1 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 1 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in present tense. Example: I (be) am happy. 1) I (be) tired. 2) I (be) hungry. 3) I (be) late! Example: He / She / It (be) is happy. Example: You / We / They (be) are happy. 7) You (be) nice. 8) We (be) sleepy. 9) They (be) funny. 4) He (be) cool. 5) She (be) pretty. 6) It (be) fast. Now we ll use nouns instead of pronouns 10) John (be) excited. 11) Tiffany and Uma (be) my friends. 12) Ricardo, John and I (be) watching a movie. 13) Hadil (be) kind. 14) Alisa (be) young. 15) The hammer (be) new. 16) My mother and father (be) cooking dinner. 17) Rachel (be) driving to school. 18) Nikkos and Billy (be) playing at the park. 19) The students (be) studying English. 20) The test (be) hard! 21) My best friend (be) coming to my house.

2 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 2 Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in present tense. Example: I (be) am excited. Example: Jessica and Akbar (be) are happy. Example: The new car (be) is nice. 1) The bag (be) blue. A. am B. are C. is 3) The children (be) young. A. am B. are C. is 5) The game (be) difficult. A. am B. are C. is 7) I (be) thirty years old. A. am B. are C. is 2) The rocks (be) hard. A. am B. are C. is 4) Thomas (be) nice. A. am B. are C. is 6) They (be) tired. A. am B. are C. is 8) Susan and Juan (be) married. A. am B. are C. is 9) Teddy (be) my friend. A. am B. are C. is 10) We (be) in English class. A. am B. are C. is

3 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 3 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of the verb "to be" in present tense. Note: The verb can be positive (+) or negative (-). Use not to form the negative. \ Example: My teacher (be) is nice. (+) Example: The cat (be, not) is not hungry. (-) 1) The old man (be) wise. 2) The sun (be) hot. 3) The children (be) eating bananas. They (be, not) eating apples. 4) I (be) happy. I (be, not) sad. 5) The racecar (be) fast. It (be, not) slow. 6) My friend (be) buying a new car. Her old car broke down. It doesn't work anymore. 7) I (be) at the beach with my family. It (be) hot and sunny outside. The ocean water (be) warm. 8) Ko and Jacob (be) very smart. Ko (be) a scientist and Jacob (be) an engineer. 9) The library (be) open until 9:00 p.m. 10) The school (be) small. It (be, not) big. 11) The books (be) new. They (be, not) old. 12) Tommy, Steven, and Teddy (be) acting in the school play. 13) Beatrice (be) at her house. 14) It (be) hot outside. It (be, not) cold outside. 15) You (be) finished with the quiz! 16) Judith (be, not) at home. She (be) school.

4 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 4 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense. My name (be) (1) John. I (be) (2) fifteen years old. I live on a farm. It (be) (3) in the country. It is quiet in the country. It (be, not) (4) loud in the country. I wake up early. Sometimes, I wake up before the sun rises. Sometimes, it (be) (5) still dark when I wake up. But I don t mind. I like waking up that early. I like the way the country looks in the morning. The first thing I do after I wake up is milk the cow. After I (be) (6) finished milking the cow, I bring the milk to my mom. I think she uses it to make breakfast. She makes a delicious breakfast. My mom (be) (7) a really good cook. Next, I feed the pigs. One time, I asked my mom how come my little sister doesn t feed them. She said it is because my sister (be, not) (8) strong enough. But I still don t understand. She is almost as strong as me! I guess my mom doesn t want my sister to get hurt. After all, the pigs can (be) (9) pretty rough, especially when they (be) (10) hungry. The last thing I do (be) (11) feed the chickens. That (be) (12) easy. I just throw some food down on the ground and they run out and eat it. While the chickens (be) (13) eating, I go into their house to collect their eggs. Chicken eggs (be) (14) really good to eat. They (be) (15) easy to cook too. That is what I do in the mornings. I (be) (16) pretty busy.

5 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 5 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense. Tess and Jen (1) best friends. They do everything together. They spend every day together. One day they meet on the bus to school. They start talking. Hey Jen, says Tess. How (2) you? Hey girl, says Jen. I (3) doing fine. What (4) going on? What (5) you doing today? Oh, says Tess, I (6) doing anything special. I don t have any plans. That (7) cool. Yeah, says Tess. But I have something to tell you. Really! Can I try to guess? Umm says Tess. Well Okay, I get three guesses. Ready? Umm, well okay. (8) we eating dinner together? No, that (9) it. Okay. Are we going to the soccer game together? No. It (10) that either. Tess looks nervous. Her eyes look sad. A tear starts to fall down her cheek. Oh, says Jen, wiping a tear from her own eye. Now I know. You (11) moving away.

6 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 6 Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in past tense. Example: You / We / They (be) were sick yesterday. Example: I / He / She / It (be) was sick yesterday. 1) I (be) tired yesterday. A. was B. were 2) You (be) happy yesterday. A. was B. were 3) We (be) sad yesterday. A. was B. were 4) They (be) busy yesterday. A. was B. were 5) He (be) angry yesterday. A. was B. were 6) She (be) sleepy yesterday. A. was B. were 7) It (be) cold yesterday. A. was B. were Practice writing sentences using the verb to be in past tense. 1) 2) 3)

7 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 7 Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in past tense. Example: You / We / They (be) were sick last night. Example: I / He / She / It (be) was sick last night. 1) I (be) tired last night. A. was B. were 2) You (be) happy last night. A. was B. were 3) Richard and I (be) excited last night. A. was B. were 4) Javier and Roberto (be) lazy last night. A. was B. were 5) Julian (be) angry yesterday. A. was B. were 6) Rachel (be) sleepy yesterday. A. was B. were 7) The movie (be) scary. I don't want to watch it again. A. was B. were 8) Ko, Teddy, and Peter (be) tired after the long drive. A. was B. were 9) Jonathan (be) hungry. So, he ate a sandwich. A. was B. were 10) My mom (be) helping the teacher at school yesterday. A. was B. were

8 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 8 Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in past tense. Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (positive) Example: Carlos (be, not) was not at work yesterday. (negative) 1) The party (be) fun last weekend. 2) They (be) watching a movie when Ernesto called. They (be, not) watching TV. 3) Jessie (be) tired. So, he went to sleep. 4) When she was a little girl, Margo (be) very good at tennis. She practiced every day. 5) My friends and I (be) studying English last night. 6) Kendra (be) in my sixth grade English class. We (be) good friends before she moved away. 7) The movie (be) really boring. It (be, not) entertaining. We stopped watching it before it was over. 8) After playing outside, my dog (be) very dirty. She came into the house and ran into my room. It (be) such a mess! 9) I (be, not) eating a sandwich when you called. I (be) eating a salad. 10) The students (be, not) ready to take the test. They needed to study more. Practice writing sentences using the verb to be in past tense. 1) 2) 3)

9 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 9 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in past tense. Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (positive) Example: Carlos (be, not) was not at work yesterday. (negative) 1) Teddy (be) driving home when I saw him. 2) Mack, Jenny, and Javier (be) walking their dog when I talked to them last Saturday. 3) Who (be) sleeping in my bed? It (be, not) James. It (be, not) Julio. Oh, I know! It (be) Roger! 4) I (be) going to the grocery store when you called. 5) At 7:00 we (be) eating dinner and watching T.V. 6) When he was a kid, Ivan (be, not) very social. He did not spend time with his friends. He spent a lot of time alone. He (be) always reading a book or listening to music in his room. 7) When I (be) in the ninth grade, I (be) five feet tall. 8) Lola (be) a very nice girl. She helped her parents, did her homework, and even took care of her little brother. It is a shame she had to move away. 9) The cat (be) faster than the mouse. So, the cat caught the mouse. Unlucky mouse! 10) The weather (be) hot. We (be) sweating. I asked my mom to roll the window down.

10 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 10 Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense. Example: My dog (be) is sick today. (present tense) Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (past tense) 1) The clouds moved away, and the sun shone through. The sky was full of pretty colors. It (be) beautiful. 2) Arturo and Ryo (be) at the party last night. 3) (be) Taylor going to the pool later? 4) The old house (be) built in ) Christopher, where (be) you last night? I (be) looking all over for you. 6) Yesterday (be) the best day of my life! 7) I (be) ready to go. When (be) we leaving? 8) Who (be) at the pool yesterday? 9) I (be) very tired. I (be) tired yesterday too. I think I (be) getting sick. 10) I (be) driving to the office this morning when I noticed that I was getting low on gas. So, I stopped to get more. A kind man filled the tank for me. He (be) very nice.

11 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 11 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense. Example: My dog (be) is sick. (present tense) Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (past tense) 1) Sarah (be) at the party last night. Li-Ning and Akmoud (be) there too. 3) Mallika and I (be) at Jenny's house yesterday. Now, we (be) at Mellissa's house. 2) Avery (be) my best friend. She and I (be) in the same English class. It meets from 10:00 to 10:50. 4) Johan and I (be) in the mountains. We (be) on a camping trip together. I hope we don't see a bear! 5) When she (be) young, Nisha (be) interested in science. However, she (be, not) interested in science anymore. Now, she (be) interested in math. 6) Tennis (be) my favorite sport when I was in high school. Now my favorite sport (be) soccer. 7) My family and I (to be) swimming in the pool when it began to thunder. The lifeguard told us we had to get out. I (be) upset, but I knew he was right. 9) It rained all day yesterday. I (be) sad because I could not go outside. However, today it (be) sunny. And I (be) happy because I can go outside! 8) Lenny (be) at the football game last night. He (be) cheering for his favorite team. After the game, he came back home and went to sleep. I think he (be) still sleeping now. Shhhh... don't wake him up! 10) Before, Yoko and Kobi (be) enemies. Now they (be) best friends.

12 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 12 Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense. I (1) going outside, said Jerry. Wait! said Jerry s mom. Don t forget to wear your jacket. It (2) cold out there. But mom, said Jerry. I don t want to wear it. I will be fine without it. Besides, it (3) that cold today. Jerry opened the door. The wind (4) blowing and the trees (5) shaking. Leaves (6) falling to the ground. He shivered a little and stood behind the door. Jerry! shouted Jerry s mom. You close that door and get your coat young man. But mom! said Jerry. But what? said Jerry s mom. I don t understand why you don t want to wear your new coat. (7) there something wrong with it? Jerry s face turned red. No! he said. Nothing s wrong with it! Then he covered his mouth with his hand. Well then said Jerry s mom. Why don t you want to wear it? Well, mom, said Jerry. I kind of well gave it away. You what? said Jerry s mom. You gave it away? Yeah. But don t worry. It (8) okay. I gave it to Marvin. And he really needs it. Why? Well, every time I see him, he looks cold. He (9) always cold, actually. His parents cannot afford to buy him a jacket. Well, that (10) a very nice thing for you to do, dear. But now what (11) you going to do without a jacket? I don t know. Maybe I ll wear my old jacket for a little while.

13 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 1 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I / You / We / They (cook) cook. Example: He / She / It (cook) cooks. 1) I ( cook / cooks ) on Monday. 2) You ( cook / cooks ) on Tuesday. 3) We ( cook / cooks ) on Wednesday. 4) They ( cook / cooks ) on Thursday. 5) He ( cook / cooks ) on Friday. 6) She ( cook / cooks ) on Saturday. 7) It ( cook / cooks ) on Sunday. Exercise 2 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I / You / We / They (wash) wash the car on Monday. Example: He / She / It (wash) washes the car on Tuesday. 1) I ( wash / washes ) the car on Monday. 2) You ( wash / washes ) the car on Tuesday. 3) We ( wash / washes ) the car on Wednesday. 4) They ( wash / washes ) the car on Thursday. 5) He ( wash / washes ) the car on Friday. 6) She ( wash / washes ) the car on Saturday. 7) It ( wash / washes ) the car on Sunday.

14 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 3 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I / You / We / They (study) study English on Monday. Example: He / She / It (study) studies English on Tuesday. 1) I (study / studies) English on Monday. 2) You (study / studies) English on Tuesday. 3) We (study / studies) English on Wednesday. 4) They (study / studies) English on Thursday. 5) He (study / studies) English on Friday. 6) She (study / studies) English on Saturday. 7) It (study / studies) English on Sunday.

15 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 4 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Use what you have learned in exercises 1, 2, and 3. Example: I / You / We / They (cook) cook. Example: He / She / It (cook) cooks. Example: I / You / We / They (wash) wash the car on Monday. Example: He / She / It (wash) washes the car on Tuesday. Example: I / You / We / They (study) study English on Monday. Example: He / She / It (study) studies English on Tuesday. 1) They (study / studies) English on Tuesday. 2) He (cook / cooks) on Tuesday. 3) I (wash / washes) the car on Wednesday. 4) We (cook / cooks) on Sunday. 5) You (wash / washes) the car on Friday. 6) She (wash / washes) the car on Saturday. 7) We (study / studies) English on Sunday. 8) It (cook / cooks) on Thursday. 9) He (study / studies) English on Friday. 10) You (wash / washes) the car on Thursday. 11) They (cook / cooks) on Wednesday. 12) She (study /studies) English on Thursday.

16 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 5 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Note: In this exercise, nouns (Tom, Amy, Daniel, etc.) are used in place of pronouns (I / You / We / They / He / She / It). So, it is a good idea to think about which pronoun you could use instead of each noun. After you know what pronoun replaces the noun, use what you have learned in exercises 1, 2, 3, and 4 to conjugate the verbs correctly. Example: Tom and I We (cook) cook on Tuesday. Example: Tom and Amy They (cook) cook on Tuesday Example: Tom He (cook) cooks on Tuesday Example: Amy She (cook) cooks on Tuesday 1) Tom and Amy (cook / cooks) on Wednesday. 2) Daniel and I (cook / cooks) on Tuesday. 3) Herbert (cook / cooks) on Sunday. 4) Carlos and Peter (wash / washes) the car on Friday. 5) Jovita (wash / washes) the car on Saturday. 6) Ko, Uri, and I (study / studies) English on Monday. 7) The students (study / studies) English on Thursday. 8) Randy (study / studies) English on Friday. 9) I (wash / washes) the car on Thursday. 10) Mack (wash / washes) the car on Monday. 11) Natasha (study / studies) English on Thursday. 12) Rachel: Hi, Nina. Can I help you? Nina: Yes. You (wash / washes) the car, and I will cook dinner. Rachel: Okay. Good plan!

17 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 6 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. 1) Monica (eat) eggs. 2) Teddy and Monica (eat) eggs. 3) Mickie (study) English every day. 4) Arthur and Jason (study) English on Monday and Tuesday. 5) Angie and I (drink) coffee. 6) Eva (like) chocolate. 7) Dustin (watch) movies. 8) Yoko (play) the piano. 9) The students (take) tests. 10) It (rain) here a lot. Exercise 7 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. 1) Dennis (cook) on Wednesday. 2) Mariella and I (cook) on Tuesday. 3) Spencer (wash) his car on Sunday. 4) Tammy and I (wash) our car on Monday. 5) You (study) science on Thursday. 6) Thomas (study) math on Friday. 7) Rickie (play) golf and tennis. 8) Justin and I (play) basketball and soccer. 9) Kim (read) fiction novels. 10) Richard and David (read) the newspaper.

18 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 8 Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I / You / We / They (play) play the guitar. Example: He / She / It (play) plays the guitar. 1) I ( bake / bakes ) cakes. 2) You ( work / works ) in an office. 3) We ( take / takes ) pictures of birds. 4) They ( talk / talks ) about cars. 5) He ( think / thinks ) about school. 6) She ( play / plays ) soccer. 7) It ( rain / rains ) here a lot. 8) I ( like / likes ) chocolate. 9) He ( like / likes ) chocolate. 10) You ( watch / watches ) movies. 11) She ( watch / watches ) movies. 12) The babies ( cry / cries ) every night. 13) The baby (cry / cries) every night. 14) I ( fly / flies ) to Belize every year. 15) My father ( fly / flies ) to Belize every year.

19 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 9 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I (play) play the guitar. Example: Jessica (play) plays the guitar. 1) I (be) sixteen years old. 2) Tommy (live) at 107 Pine Lane. 3) Juana (cook) dinner for her family. 4) They (eat) lunch at 12:00. 5) Nina (take) medicine when she is sick. 6) I (like) chocolate. 7) He (drive) a nice car. 8) We (want) to see a movie tonight. 9) Mr. Anderson (teach) chemistry at Hill High School. 10) They (study) English at school. 11) I (want) to go home now. 12) Bill and Calicia (drive) to the mountains every year. every year. 13) We (eat) pasta once a week. 14) It (snow) here in December. 15) When Dax (take) a shower, he (wash) his hair with shampoo.

20 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 10 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I/You/We/They (play) play the guitar. Example: He/She/It (play) plays the guitar. 1) Mary (be) twenty-nine years old. 2) We (like) to eat fruit. It (taste) good. 3) The football team never (score). It (lose) all the time. 4) Roberta and Betty always (talk) to each other on the phone. 5) Jose and I (study) chemistry together. 6) The car (have) a flat tire. 7) You never (make) breakfast for me. I always (have) to make it myself. 8) The mechanic (fix) my car when it breaks down. 9) Tom rarely (fly). He usually (drive). 10) I usually (watch) TV, but tonight I (think) I will read a book. 11) Igor (call) his mother on the phone every day. 12) When he (be) alone at night, Beto sometimes (get) scared. 13) I (be) tired. I (think) I am going to take a nap. 14) Cakes (be) hard to make. They (require) a lot of work. 15) Joel (like) to play soccer. He (practice) every day.

21 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 11 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Affirmative (+): Example: He (play) plays the guitar. Negative (-): He (not, play) does not play the guitar. 1) I rarely (eat) chocolate. I (not, like) the way it (taste). 2) We (like) to watch movies. My favorite movie (be) Titanic. 3) The ocean (sound) like an airplane. 4) The flag (blow) in the wind every day. It is getting old. It (need) to be replaced soon. 5) The janitor at my school (empty) the trash on Sunday. 6) Angelica always (try) to make new friends. 7) James (run) two miles every day. 8) Elizabeth often (march) with the band. 9) John and I (open) presents at Christmas. 10) When there is a fire, the firemen (rush) to put it out. After the fire (be) out, they (go) home. 11) I (be, not) tired. I (think) I will read a book. 12) Shelley (not, think) this quiz is hard. But I (do)!

22 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 12 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Example: I (play) play the guitar. Example: Jessica (play) plays the guitar. Example: He (not, play) does not play the guitar. 1) I always (eat) vegetables. Carrots (be) my favorite. 2) Randy (like) swimming in the ocean, but he (be) afraid of sharks. 3) It (be) really cold outside, and I (not, have) a jacket! 4) We (think ) it is fun to ride roller coasters. 5) Roberto and Kelly (hunt) for eggs every Easter. 6) The simple present tense (be) easy! 7) My family (want) to visit the pyramids in Egypt. 8) Donna (love) the summer. She also (like) winter. 9) Liz and Tommy (travel) to the coast every year. 10) The baby (cry) every time it (want) to be fed. 11) You (need) to exercise in order to stay healthy. 12) What time (be) Rubiela getting here? She (be) late! 13) Yoko (win) the science contest every year. She (be) so smart! 14) Ken (be) a baker. He (bake) cakes and pastries every morning. Then he (sell) them to his customers. Everybody (love) Ken's bakery.

23 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 13 Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about the action of a verb. Example: Joseph (always, climb) always climbs trees in his yard. Example: Ernestine (usually, pick) usually picks flowers on Mondays. 1) Julia (sometimes, sell) lemonade on hot days. 2) Thomas (often, play) baseball after school. 3) My neighbor (never, paint) his house; it looks terrible! 4) The students (eagerly, leave) their classrooms when the bell rings. 5) Mrs. Gomez (quickly, water) the plants when she (get) home at five o'clock. 6) Each night, Serena (kindly, help) her little sister with geography homework. 7) Stuart (happily, play) video games with his friends on Saturdays. 8) Joan and Nate (patiently, wait) for the bus to arrive each day. 9) The jazz musicians in our town (frequently, win) competitions. 10) The merry-go-round (slowly, come) to a stop every five minutes.

24 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 14 Simple Present Tense Review Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Hi. My name (be) (1) Albert. My friends (call) (2) me Al. You can call me Al if you (like) (3). I (want) to tell you about a problem I (have) (4).It (be, not) (5) a big problem, but it is not a small problem, either. I (guess) (6) it's somewhere between big and small. I (have) (7) a best friend. His name (be) (8) Joe, but everybody (call) (9) him Joey. Joey and I have been friends for a long time. That's the problem. Joey (like) (10) to smoke. He (say) (11) he (do, not) (12) but I (know) (13) he (do) (14).He (try) (15) to hide it from me, but I (see) (16) him do it sometimes. When I see him do it, he just (laugh) (17) and (walk) (18) away. Now, Joey (smoke) (19) every day. When he (come) (20) over to my house, he (always, bring) (21) his cigarettes with him. He (keep) (22) them in his pocket. He (think) (23) they are cool. He (not, think) (24) it's a bad idea to smoke. He (say) (25) "(not, worry) (26) Al. I'm okay." He (tell) (27) me that I (not, understand) (28),but I (think) (29) I (do) (30). I (feel) (31) like it's his right to smoke. He can do what he (want) (32) to do, right? But I can (not, help) (33) worrying. He's my best friend.

25 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 15 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Example: I (play) am playing the piano now. Example: You / We / they (play) are playing the piano now. Example: He / She / It (play) the piano now. 1) I (play) the piano now. 2) You (play) the guitar now. 3) We (play) violins now. 4) They (play) harps now. 5) He (play) the trumpet now. 6) She (play) the flute now. 7) It (play) the drums now.

26 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 16 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Note: Sometimes you must double the last letter in the word before you add "ing". The rule for doubling is: when a one-syllable verb ends with consonant-vowel-consonant, the final consonant is doubled. If the verb is longer than one syllable, the final consonant is doubled only if the stress falls on the last syllable. Exceptions: never double the letters h,w,x,y. Example: I (run) am running now. Example: You / We / They (run) are running now. Example: He / She / It (run) is running now. Example: I (talk) am talking now. Example: You / We / They (talk) are talking now. Example: He / She / It (talk) is talking now. 1) I (run) now. 2) I (talk) now. 3) You (get) hungry now. 4) You (eat) now. 5) We (plan) the vacation now. 6) They (play) the game now. 7) They (stop) the game now. 8) He (swim) in the pool now. 9) He (sleep) in the bed now. 10) She (shop) at the mall now. 11) She (eat) with her friends now.

27 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 17 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Note: In this exercise, nouns (Tom, Amy, Daniel, etc.) are used in place of pronouns (I / You / We / They / He / She / It). So, it is a good idea to think about which pronoun you could use instead of each noun. After you know what pronoun replaces the noun, use what you have learned in exercises 15 and 16 to conjugate the verbs correctly. Example: I (listen) am listening to music now. Example: You / We /they (listen) are listening to music now. Example: He / She / It (listen) is listening to music now. 1) Jason (listen) to music now. 2) I (talk) now. 3) Erin and Jessica (make) a cake right now. 4) Shhh be quiet! The teacher (speak) now! 5) Marcos and I (study) English now. 6) Are Daniel and James playing football this year? No, they soccer. 7) Emily (eat) breakfast now. 8) My car (make) strange noises. I need to get it checked out. 9) Mr. Cooper: Hello. May I speak to Andrew? Bob: No, he (sleep) right now. May I take a message? 10) Jennifer: Is Rosa coming to the park with us? Yoko: No, she (work) today. Jennifer: Oh, poor girl!

28 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 18 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Example: I (buy) am buying groceries now. Example: You / We / They / (buy) are buying groceries now. Example: He / She / It (buy) is buying groceries now. 1) Right now, I (buy) groceries. I need eggs, milk, and bread. 2) We (eat) dinner. It tastes good. Can you pass me the salt, please? 3) He (drink) milk. It looks good. It (run) down his chin. He needs a napkin. 4) Billy (do) his homework now. We are going to watch a movie when he is finished. 5) All of the children (dance) at the party. They (smile). They (have) a good time. 6) Jenny (take) pictures of Roman Cathedrals. 7) My car (move) down the hill. I forgot to engage the parking break. Somebody please help me! 8) Andrea and Alejandro (take) a walk. The fresh air feels great. 9) Dr. Mason is busy. He (see) a patient right now. He will see you in twenty minutes. 10) Mr. Henderson and I (talk) on the phone. He (tell) me about his children. They seem nice.

29 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 19 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Example: I (listen) am listening to music now. Example: You / We / They (study) are studying English now. Example: He / She / It (take) is taking a shower now. 1) Amy and Alison (take) the dog for a walk. Gabriella (comb) her hair. I (brush) my teeth. 2) Tommy and Brian (listen) to music. It sounds like rock music. 3) Right now, Mr. Andrews (drive) the bus. The bus (move) slowly. I don't mind, though. I am not in a hurry. 4) The band (play) a song. 5) Right now, my sister (compete) in a tennis match. I think she (lose). She does not look very happy. 6) We (work) in the office until 5:00 today. 7) Be careful! Megan (cook), and the oven is hot. 8) Rachel and her friend (come) to dinner tonight. They (get) ready now. They should be here in twenty minutes. 9) Right now, the machines (make) car parts. They will be finished in two hours. 10) The outdoorsmen (climb) Mt. Denali this year. I hope they make it to the top!

30 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 20 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now. Example: You / We / They (play) are playing a game now. Example: He / She / It (eating) is eating a hamburger now. 1) Amelia and Abjar (move) to California this week. 2) The bright lights (flash). They (hurt) my eyes. 3) Right now, you (type) on the computer. 4) The groundskeeper (mow) the grass. 5) The computer (process) a command. 6) Aunt Janet (paint) a picture. She is almost finished. 7) My dog (jump) and wagging its tail. It must be excited. 8) The rain (fall) very fast now. I think a big storm (come) this way. We had better get prepared. 9) The old man (smoke) his pipe. He (think) about his grandchildren. 10) Elijah (run) in a race. He (try) to win. I think he can.

31 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 21 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Affirmative (+): Example: I (read) am reading a book now. Example: You / We / They (speak) are speaking English now. Example: He / She / It (run) is running in a race today. Negative (-): Example: I (not, drive) am not driving to work today. I am walking. Example: Marlene and Joseph (not, come) are not coming with me to the movie. Example: Pedro (not, cook) is not cooking dinner tonight. 1) Dennis (hike) up the mountain right now. He is almost at the top. I bet he (get) pretty tired. 2) I (tell) a bedtime story to my children, but I don't think they (listen). Their eyes are closed. I think they (sleep). 3) The comedian (act) funny. The audience (laugh) at his jokes. 4) It (get) cold outside and my son (camp) high up in the mountains. I hope he (not, freeze) up there! 5) Eddie (not, write) a novel. He (write) a poem. 6) Uncle Terry and his friend (fish) at the lake today. They (not, fish) at the beach. 7) Beto (sing) in the shower. He has a nice voice! 8) You (meet) the President tonight. He (expect) you to talk about the new proposal. Are you ready?

32 \ ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 22 Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about the action of a verb. Example: Violet (gracefully, dance) is gracefully dancing a ballet. Example: Raul (wisely, check) is wisely checking the oil in his car. 1) The breeze (softly, blow) on our faces. 2) The dog is very hungry. He is (quickly, eat) all of his food. 3) The chestnut racehorse (already, cross) the finish line. Its owner is very happy. 4) Jonathan (rarely, exercise), now that he is in college. 5) Mrs. Stevens (angrily, yell) at the man who hit her car. 6) Be careful! You (almost, spill) the paint. 7) The police (abruptly, stop) traffic at the intersection. 8) Chad (nervously, ask) Tina for a date. 9) Dr. Wong (calmly, explain) the operation to the patient's family. 10) The little girl (shyly, talk) to Santa Claus. She wants him to bring her a puppy!

33 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 23 Review of the Present Progressive Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense. Hey! Do you want to hear about what my family (do) (1) right now? Well, I hope you do, because I am going to tell you! Right now, my dad (work) (2) outside. I can see him. He (mow) (3) the grass. He loves my mother very much. He (always, talk) (4) about her. He (always, do) (5) nice things for her. Right now, my dad (sing) (6) a song. I bet it is a song about my mom. Now, let's look at my mom. She (cook) (7) something in the kitchen. It smells so good! She (put) (8) some kind of spices into the pot. The pot (sit) (9) on the stove. The water (boil) ) (10) inside it. Also, something (bake) (11) in the oven. It (start) (12) to turn brown. I think it is a turkey. I also have two younger brothers. Right now they (play) (13) with their toys on the floor beside me. They (laugh) (14) with one another. They (make) (15) a house out of blocks. The house (get) (16) taller and taller. Oh no! The house is too tall. Watch out! It (crash) (17) to the floor! We are a happy family. I feel lucky to be a part of my family. Hmmm let me guess you (think) (18) about your own family now, aren't you?

34 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 24 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or present progressive tense. Example: I (watch) watch a lot of movies. [simple present tense] Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now. [present progressive tense] Example: You / We / They (play) play games every day. [simple present tense] Example: You / We / they (play) are playing a game now. [present progressive tense] Example: He / She / It (eat) eats eggs for breakfast. [simple present tense] Example: He / She / It (eat) is eating an egg now. [present progressive tense] 1) Right now I (watch) a movie. I (watch) a lot of movies. 2) Rickie (be) my friend. We (like) to talk together. Right now we (talk) about school. 3) The police officer (wear) a badge and a gun to work every day. 4) Jaime usually (eat) cold cereal for breakfast, but today he (eat) oatmeal instead. 5) Alison and I (study) for the exam. We (not, want) to fail it! 6) Jonas (sing) in the band on Saturdays, and Veda (play) the guitar. 7) My uncle (live) in Tennessee. I (live) in North Carolina. 8) My mom (cook) dinner tonight. (You, want) to eat with us? 9) Tiffany and Mark (travel) to Spain. They will stay in Madrid. 10) We (read) the newspaper every morning.

35 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 25 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or present progressive tense. Example: I (watch) watch a lot of movies. [simple present tense] Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now. [present progressive tense] Example: You / We / They (play) play games every day. [simple present tense] Example: You / We / They (play) are playing a game now. [present progressive tense] Example: He / She /It (eat) eats eggs for breakfast. [simple present tense] Example: He / She / It (eat) is eating an egg now. [present progressive tense] 1) Jessie (ride) his bike every day. In fact, he (ride) his bike right now. 2) Arnold and Peter (take) a test now. They (take) a lot of tests. 3) I (want) some new shoes. The pair I (have) now (get) old. 4) Tony (be) my friend. We (spend) a lot of time together. 5) What (be) your name? Where (be) you from? Where (do) you live? 6) I (no, watch) TV now. I (talk) on the phone. I (like) to talk on the phone. 7) Andrea (like) to cook. Right now, she (make) vegetable soup. 8) When (do) the bus leave? I hope we (be) not too late! 9) I (be) so thirsty! (you, have) anything to drink? 10) Thomas (read) the newspaper and (drink) coffee in the living room. He (no, do) have to go to work today.

36 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 26 Review of the Simple Present and Present Progressive Tenses. Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or present progressive tense. Rachel's Diary Do Not Touch!!! September 29, 2010 My First Day Here Today (be) (1) the first day at my new school. Right now, it is lunch time, and all of the students (eat) (2) their lunches. They (sit) (3) around the big table in the cafeteria, (talk) (4) in small groups. I (sit) (5) alone. I (be) (6) pretty nervous. I (hope) (7) the other students (not, think) (8) I am weird. I (write) (9) in my diary right now to look like I (have) (10) something important to do. For lunch today, I (have) (11) an apple, pretzels, and a tuna fish sandwich. I (hate) (12) tuna fish, but my mom (love) (13) it. She (say) (14) it is good for me. She (pack) (15) it for me every day, so I (guess) (16) I have to eat it. I (also, have) (17) some cookies. At least I (like) (18) to eat those. Hey! The girls at the big table (look) (19) at me! What (they, want) (20)? They (laugh) (21) at something. What (they, laugh) (22) at? I hope they (not, laugh) (23) at me. I (get) (24) nervous again. Oh my gosh! One of them (come) (25) this way! Stay calm, Rachel. She is not going to hurt you. She is just another girl like you, right? Wait. Now she (hold) (26) out her hand to me. Does she (want) (27) to be friends? What (she, do) (28)? Oh, I know! She (invite) (29) me to her table! Maybe I (be, not) (30) that weird after all!

37 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 27 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Note: To form the simple present perfect tense, has or have is used with a past participle (the word that comes after "had") to describe an action that has happened in the past and may still be happening. The past participle is often regular, and therefore retains its simple past tense spelling, as visited does here. Example: I / You / We / they (visit) have visited Argentina before. Example: He / She / It (visit) has visited Argentina before. 1) I (visit) Australia before. 2) You (visit) Mexico before. 3) We (visit) Canada before. 4) They (visit) China before. 5) He (visit) Africa before 6) She (visit) India before. 7) It (visit) Europe before. Exercise 28 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Note: All of the past participles used will be regular. Example: John (walk) has walked to school since first grade. He is in fifth grade now. Example: The girls (finish) have finished cleaning their rooms. Now they can go shopping. 1) Our company (arrive). Please answer the door. 2) The ice on the sidewalk (melt). I think the sun is out today. 3) The McMillans (prepare) a lot of food for the party. It looks delicious. 4) Tony s flight from New Jersey (land). We should see him any minute. 5) The bank officers (suggest) that the meeting be scheduled for Wednesday morning. I will try to locate a conference room. 6) Sparky (taste) his new dog food, and he seems to like it. 7) The police (arrest) two men for the robbery. It is time to question them. 8) The medicine (cure) William s illness. It seems miraculous.

38 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 29 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Note: In this exercise, all of the past participles are irregular. This means that they have unexpected changes in spelling and pronunciation which are not the same as the simple past forms. You may want to refer to a list of irregular verbs to find irregular past participles. Example: Amy (eat) has eaten lunch already. Example: Amy and Arnold (eat) have eaten lunch already. 1) Mark (eat) dinner already. He is not hungry. 2) Beth (write) three letters today. She misses her family. 3) Yoko and Armand (take) the test. Now they can relax. 4) Marty and I (be) to Costa Rica three times. We are familiar with the culture. 5) I (drink) six cups of water today. 6) Eva (sing) in a chorus before. Her voice is pretty. 7) Chong-Li (get) very good at speaking English. She has practiced a lot. 8) Lucy (hide) in the woods. Now her friends will try to find her. 9) It (be) a good week so far. 10) You (show) that you are a hard worker. Good job! 11) Daisy (wear) a dress to work every day this week. 12) Mr. Lee (drive) from Texas to Iowa for the conference. He needs to get some rest before it starts. 13) Juan (ride) horses since he was a little boy. It is easy for him. 14) Mr. and Mrs. Sanchez (become) grandparents. Their daughter, Josefina, had a baby yesterday. 15) The movie (begin). Please be quiet!

39 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 30 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Then, indicate whether the past participle is regular or irregular. Example: Ida (look) has looked all morning for her glasses. She still can t find them. (regular / irregular) Example: The wind (blow) has blown our patio furniture away. Let s go get it. (regular / irregular) 1) Charity (break) her leg on the ski slope. Please dial 911. (regular / irregular) 2) The city (allow) residents to shoot off fireworks each year on the Fourth of July. (regular / irregular) 3) The lake (freeze) solid. Now we can go skating. (regular / irregular) 4) The sun (rise). It s time to get up. (regular / irregular) 5) The army (battle) the enemy for two weeks. The soldiers are exhausted. (regular / irregular ) 6) The principal (introduce) the new teacher. She seems very nice. (regular / irregular) 7) Using his telescope, Jeremy (see) other galaxies. He writes them on his blog. (regular / irregular) 8) The judge (listen) to all of the evidence. Now he will make a ruling. (regular / irregular) 9) The strawberries (spoil). They should have been kept in the refrigerator. (regular / irregular) 10) The doctor (write) a book about disease prevention. It will be published soon. (regular / irregular)

40 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 31 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Example: I / You / We / they (visit) have visited Venezuela before. Example: He / She / It (visit) has visited Venezuela before. Example: Susan (run) has run a marathon race before. Example: Paul and his brother (drive) have driven to New England before. 1) I (visit) Tennessee before. 2) You (visit) Utah before. 3) We (visit) North Carolina before. 4) They (visit) California before. 5) He (visit) Texas before. 6) She (visit) New York before. 7) It (visit) Colorado before. 8) They (take) the test. Now they must wait for their scores. 9) I (eat) dinner already. I am not hungry. 10) All of the children (brush) their teeth. Now it's time for bed. 11) Andrew (finish) his work. He is ready to take a break. 12) Mimi (play) golf before. 13) I (see) this movie before. I don't want to watch it again. 14) I (wash) my clothes. Now I can put them on. 15) You (complete) this exercise. Hooray!

41 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 32 Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about the action of a verb. Example: Juliet (always, work) has always worked at the library. Example: The six-year-olds (happily, play) have happily played outside for an hour. 1) The babysitter (often, cook) dinner for the children lately because their parents have been working late. 2) Mr. and Mrs. Thompson (never, travel) overseas. They like staying closer to home. 3) Professor Alvarez (usually, test) his biology class twice each semester. Occasionally, though, he gives three tests. 4) Tim and Todd (sometimes, play) banjos at the festival. We hope they will be able to play there this year. 5) In the aftermath of last week s hurricane, the volunteers (willingly, work) long hours. Many are exhausted, but refuse to quit. 6) The teacher (already, plan) a party for her students because she feels that they have worked very hard and deserve to celebrate. 7) The florist (quickly, arrange) the flowers for the wedding. Now that he is finished, the caterers are bringing in food for the reception. 8) Mr. and Mrs. Yang (frequently, travel) home to Shanghai since they moved to New York City. They like living near their daughter s family in New York, but miss their old friends back home.

42 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 33 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense. Affirmative (+) : Example: Charles (taste) has tasted Guacamole before. Example: We (visit) have visited China six times. Example: They (already, finish) have already finished their homework. Negative (-) : Example: We (not, eat) have not eaten dinner yet. 1) Mrs. Polanski (know) Peter since he was a little boy. She has lived next door to his family for many years. 2) After eight hours, Angel and Roberto (arrive) in California. They drove there today from New Mexico, and want to go to San Diego tomorrow. 3) Nastia (live) in Norway for twenty-two years. She enjoys living there. She doesn t mind the cold winters, but she especially likes to spend summer vacations at the North Sea. 4) Ariel (be) a gymnast for eight years. She (break) six bones since she began practicing gymnastics. She likes to get her friends to sign her casts. 5) (You, be) to Africa before? I (hear) it is beautiful there. I would like to go on a safari in Kenya. 6) The President (speak). His decision is final. Many people don t agree with him, but making hard decisions is part of his job. I would not want that job! 7) The letter you sent me (not, arrive) yet. I (check) my mailbox for it every day. I wonder where it could be. 8) I (wait) for thirty minutes and my friend (not, come) to meet me. I am a little worried about her, because she is always on time. 9) I (visit) Spain before. It is a beautiful country. I love the old, southern city of Cádiz, which has wonderful plazas and beaches.

43 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 34 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present perfect progressive tense. Note: The present perfect progressive tense expresses the idea that something has happened continuously since some time in the past, and is still happening now. Example: I / You / We / They (work) have been working for two hours. Example: He / She / It (work) has been working for two hours. 1) I (write) my new book for ten months. Writing it has been taken a lot of hard work and research. Thankfully, it is almost finished. 2) The runners (race) since 9:00 in the morning. Now it is 3:00 p.m., and the leaders are about to cross the finish line. 3) The weather has been dreary all week. It (rain) since Monday. Hopefully, we will have some sunshine this weekend. 4) Anthony (play) soccer his entire life. Soon, he will go to college on a soccer scholarship. 5) The) baby (cry) all night. He has been doing that every night since he was born. His parents are so tired. They are hoping that his sleeping habits will change soon! 6) Julian and I (try) to find jobs for two weeks. We are a little discouraged, but we cannot give up. 7) Mrs. Burk is giving her students an algebra test right now. The students (take) the test for thirty-five minutes. They have five minutes until time is up. 8) Ichiro is worried because his keys are lost. He needs to go to work. He (look) for them for fifteen minutes. Let s help him.

44 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 35 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present perfect progressive tense. Affirmative (+) Example: He (wait) has been waiting on the train for two hours. Negative (-) Example: Don't worry. We (not, wait) have not been waiting for you for long. 1) The children (play) outside all day. They must be getting hungry by now. They need to come inside for dinner. 2) This week, we (read) selections from the Romantic Period in Literature class. My favorite Romantic authors are Poe and Hawthorne. 3) The criminal has not been caught yet. The police (chase) him since yesterday. 4) Lu Peng (make) bread all day. It smells so good! His bakery is next door to our shop. We are taking two loaves of his fresh bread home when we close the shop tonight. 5) The construction workers (build) that house all winter. They (not, work) on it this week, though, because it (rain) every day since Monday. 6) The roses (not, bloom) much lately. We (not, water) them enough. The soil is getting dry. 7) I (not, sleep) very well lately. I think I need to get more exercise during the day. That would help me to feel tired at night. 8) Akira (learn) about plants in her biology class. She is paying close attention to the lectures. She wants to become a botanist some day.

45 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 36 Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense or present perfect progressive tense. Simple Present Perfect Tense: Example: Charles (taste) has tasted guacamole before. Example: Edie (not, call) has not called her parents yet. Example: We (already, finish) have already finished our homework. Example: (He, eat) Has he eaten dinner yet? Present Perfect Progressive Tense: Example: He (wait) has been waiting on the bus for an hour. Example: She (not, do) has not been doing very well in school lately. Example: (They, swim) Have they been swimming in the lake? 1) We (already, bake) the cake. Now, we just have to decorate it with icing. Would you like to help? 2) Have you ever been to Italy? I (see) pictures of the town of Assisi. Some day, I would like to travel there to see its beautiful churches. 3) The voters (elect) a new governor. She (make) her acceptance speech for the past thirty minutes. I hope she will finish soon! 4) The package I sent to Pablo (not, arrive) yet. He (call) the Post Office every day. I don't know what happened to it. 5) The fishermen (not, catch) many fish today. A strong wind (blow) all day, and they are having trouble with their nets. 6) (Edward, receive) the money yet? I sent it to him last week. 7) Mahmoud and Rickie are dirty. They (play) outside all day. It is time for them to come in and take a bath. 8) (You, hear) the news? There was a terrible earthquake in Haiti! The residents need a lot of help. 9) Igor (want) to visit Paris for years. He (save) his money for a plane ticket. He (almost, save) enough.

46 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 37 Review of the Present Perfect Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense or present perfect progressive tense. Mrs. Rogers: Good afternoon, Mr. Tenny. Thank you for coming to the interview today. I am so glad you could make time to meet. Mr. Tenny: Hello, Mrs. Rogers. It s nice to meet you. I (hear) (1) that your company has grown and needs more space. Mrs. Rogers: Yes, that s why we re searching for an architect. May I ask you some questions about your employment history and professional experience? That way, we can both decide whether the job is a good fit for you. Mr. Tenny: Sure. Mrs. Rogers: Okay. On your resume, it says that you (work) (2) as an architect for the last eighteen years. Is that right? Mr. Tenny: Yes, that's correct. I (have) (3) a lot of experience in the field during those years. It has been a great career for me. I (always, love) (4) architecture, ever since I visited the pyramids in Egypt as a young boy. Mrs. Rogers: The pyramids are fascinating. But, I would guess that you have not spent your career designing pyramids. Mr. Tenny (laughing): No! Not at all. I have designed many different types of buildings, both for commercial and private use. Mrs. Rogers: Well, we are looking for someone to design our next office building. We have outgrown the space we have, and need to move ahead on a new building right away. We re thinking about a building around twenty stories tall. (You, have) (5) any experience with buildings of that size? Mr. Tenny: Yes. I (design) (6) several tall buildings, including a twentytwo-story bank building in Atlanta and a twenty-five-story insurance building in Utah. I also oversaw the construction of two thirty-five-story buildings in Texas. Those were built for an oil refining company.

47 Mrs. Rogers: You certainly have worked with people from a wide range of professions. Mr. Tenny: That s true, and it is part of what makes my work interesting. Mrs. Rogers: That's great. Now, can you please tell me a bit about the project you (work) (7) on recently? I understand that you are using a lot of technology in this one. Mr. Tenny: That s right. For the past two months, I (assemble) (8) a team to build an energy-efficient, environmentally-friendly building. It will use solar energy. I (spend) (9) a lot of my time on this project lately. Mrs. Rogers: Yes, I (hear) (10) a lot about your new project. I (read) (11) about it in the newspaper for the past few weeks. It sounds exciting. Mr. Tenny: Yes, it is. It will be different than any other building I (work) (12) on. Is your company interested in including green technology in your new buildings? Mrs. Rogers: Yes, we are--very much so. Our board of directors feels that our buildings should have as little impact on the environment as possible. Also, we are concerned about working conditions. We would like to include a nice outdoor park area with a walking track and picnic tables for our employees. Mr. Tenny: That is wonderful. That (become) (13) a trend in new construction for office buildings in the past few years. Employees need exercise. They need to take at least one break from their computer screens every day and get outdoors. Mrs. Rogers: I agree. Mr. Tenny: Is there anything else you would like to know while I am here? Mrs. Rogers: Not at the moment. I think I (get) (14) all the information I need for now. Thank you for coming. We will be holding a second series of interviews with the top candidates. Our Vice President of Development, Mr. Ferguson, will be in charge of those. I expect we will be contacting you shortly. Mr. Tenny: Wonderful. I (enjoy) (15) our talk. Have a nice day, Mrs. Rogers. Mrs. Rogers: You too, Mr. Tenny.

48 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Exercise 38 Present Tense Cumulative Review Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in any aspect of the present tense. Ring! Ring! Beto: Hello. Justin: May I please speak to Beto? Beto: Yes, this is he. Justin: Beto! How (be) (1) you? This is Justin. Beto: Ahhh Justin! I (be) (2) fine. How are you? Justin: I m great, thanks. Beto: That (be) (3) good. So, what s up? Justin: Well, I (have) (4) a question for you. Beto: Sure. Justin: My motorcycle (be) (5) broken. I (try) (6) to repair it for days. I (no, know) (7) what is wrong with it. I (no, can, fix) (8) it. Justin: Have you tried to start it? Beto: Yes, I (try) (9) to start it many times, but it just won t work. The motorcycle is pretty new. I just got it last November. Beto: Hmm. Well, what (happen) (10) when you try to start it? What kind of noise does it make? Justin: It (make) (11) a strange sound. Then the engine (die) (12). Beto: Okay. (You, stand) (13) beside it right now? Justin: Yes. Beto: Okay. There are some things that you need to check. First, you need to inspect the spark plugs. Justin: Hold on. Okay, I (inspect) (14) them under a light now. They look clean.

49 Beto: Okay, that's good. Now, you need to check the oil. It s possible that you don t have enough. Justin: Hold on. Okay, I (check) (15) the oil right now. It (look) (16) clean, and the tank is full. I just filled it up last week, so I didn t think that would be the problem. Beto: Okay, that s good. Now you need to test the battery. (You, have) (17) a battery tester? Justin: Yes, I do. My brother got me one for my birthday. Let s see okay, I (use) (18) it right now. The battery (appear) (19) to be full of life. Beto: Hmm. That is strange. I (wonder) (20) what the problem could be! Justin: Yes very strange. I (not, understand) (21) it. My brother thinks the motorcycle is trash. He (not, think) (22) it will ever start again. He (say) (23) I need to take it to the junkyard. Beto: That s too bad. Well, there (be) (24) one more thing you can check. Justin: Really? Beto: Yes, but I am sure you (check) (25) it already. It s probably the first thing you thought of. Justin: Well, what is it? Beto: The gas level. Justin: Wait! I (not, check) (26) that yet! Hold on! I (check) (27) the gas level now. Beto: Well, what (do) (28) it look like? Justin: It (look) (29) empty! Wow, that (be) (30) the problem. How embarrassing. I am sorry that I bothered you about this! Beto: That s okay. The same thing (happen) (31) to me before. You had better go get some gas! Talk you to you later! Justin: Okay, thanks!

50 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A Christmas in March Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Just before Christmas in 1944, a letter arrived at our house in Philadelphia. The postmark was from Tuskegee, Alabama, so we all knew who it was from. We excitedly gathered around Mother as she opened it at the kitchen table. My Dear Mother, I did not get the leave I expected for Christmas. I will miss all of you. Please leave the Christmas tree up until I make it back. I hope to be home by March. Love from your son, Clifton I was 17-years-old at the time. My heart sank. I felt a profound sadness about my favorite brother not being home for Christmas. He was one of the Tuskegee Airmen and was responsible for maintaining the airplanes flying off to fight in World War II. My mother, being the optimist she always was, said, Well, it looks like we ll get to have two Christmases this year! After Christmas, my sister and I worked together to make sure we kept that Christmas tree looking as pretty as possible. This was no easy feat. By mid January, the branches drooped so low to the ground that they became a sliding board for the decorations. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor. My sister and I took turns sweeping them up. We repositioned the ornaments to the stronger branches on the tree, hoping they would stay on. Each time we freshened that tree up, my sister and I were full of thoughts about Clifton and how happy we would be to see him again. It made us feel that he was close by, even though he was hundreds of miles away. On March 5, the doorbell rang. We ran to the door and gave Clifton a big hug. As he hugged my Mother, I could see him peak over her head at the Christmas tree. It s beautiful, he said. Thank you. Clifton opened his presents and told us all sorts of stories about his work in Tuskegee. That night as we slept, we heard a crash in the living room. We all ran to see what had happened. The tree had toppled onto the sofa and there were needles and broken ornaments everywhere. We all had a good laugh. It was fortuitous Clifton got home when he did!

51 Questions: 1) How did the narrator's mood shift after Clifton's letter was read to the family? A. from grand to humble B. from jubilance to anger C. from uncertainty to clarity D. from excitement to disappointment 2) The mother is an optimist. This means she... A. is not easily upset. B. upholds high standards. C. maintains a positive viewpoint. D. considers all outcomes before making a decision. 3) What can we conclude from the letter? Check all that are correct. A. Clifton misses his family. B. Clifton will be home by March. C. Clifton will not be home for Christmas. D. Clifton is one of the Tuskegee Airmen. 4) Which word best describes the work the sisters did to help keep the tree looking pretty? A. It was a miracle. B. It was a debacle. C. It was a discovery. D. It was a collaboration. 5) What is the most likely reason the narrator compared the tree limbs to a sliding board? A. The limbs were so high in the air. B. The ornaments were slipping off. C. The sisters liked to play on them. D. The branches felt slippery with no needles on them.

52 Questions (continued): 6) "Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor." "My sister and I took turns sweeping them up." What is the best way to combine the above sentences? A. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor, therefore, my sister and I took turns sweeping them up. B. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor, and so my sister and I took turns sweeping them up. C. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor because my sister and I took turns sweeping them up. D. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over the wooden floor until my sister and I took turns sweeping them up. 7) What did caring for the tree come to represent for the sisters? A. a continual hardship B. a way of being close to their brother C. a hope that the war would end soon D. an indication that they did not know when Clifton would return 8) What other title would fit this passage best? A. "Flying Home" B. A Christmas War C. "Granting Clifton's Wish" D. The Disappointing Letter 9) How does Clifton seem to feel when he sees the Christmas tree? A. appreciative B. disappointed C. estranged D. remorseful 10) Which describe fortuitous circumstances? Check all that make sense. A. getting the last seat on the bus B. having an umbrella when it begins to rain C. reporting a robbery after you see it happen D. doing well in a test you have studied hard for

53 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A Cold Day Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. It is a frigid January day in York, Pennsylvania. The temperature is below freezing. Snow is starting to fall. Dr. James turns on the television to check the weather. He must leave for his work at the hospital soon. Today is going to be very cold, says the TV weatherman. Be sure to wear very warm clothes when you go outside. Also, be careful driving on the roads. Snowfall will make them slippery. In fact, if you can stay home today, do it! Dr. James cannot stay home. Very sick people are waiting to see him at the hospital. He goes to his closet. He takes out the warmest clothes he has. He puts on a sweater, jacket, gloves, socks, boots and a hat. He opens his front door to go to work. A gust of cold air blows inside. Wow, it is very cold outside, Dr. James says. He is from Miami and does not like the cold. The weatherman was right! Before he can drive to work, Dr. James must clear the snow off his car. He does this very fast. He hops in the car. He shivers. His neck feels especially cold. Dr. James drives slowly to work. Everyone else is driving slowly, too. There is a lot of traffic on the road. There are cars in front and behind. Suddenly, the cars in front of Dr. James come to a stop. There has been an accident! Dr. James hurries from his car to check on the driver of the car that has swerved off the road. Is everyone okay? Dr. James asks. Yes, yes, we are fine. We slipped on a patch of ice, the driver says. This would have been a good day to stay home in bed.

54 Questions: 1) What does it mean if the weather is frigid? A. It is very cold. B. It is very rainy. C. It is very windy. D. It is very slippery. 2) In what city does this story take place? A. Florida B. Miami C. Pennsylvania D. York 3) Why doesn't Dr. James stay home today? A. There are sick people waiting for him. B. He does not believe the weatherman. C. He has to clear the snow off his car. D. He must help the people in the accident. 4) What could Dr. James have put on his neck to keep it warm? A. mittens B. a scarf C. another hat D. an undershirt 5) What does Dr. James do before he leaves for work? Check all that are correct. A. dresses warmly B. calls the hospital C. watches the weather D. clears the snow from his car 6) Given what is said in the story, what is most likely true about Miami? A. It is a hot place. B. It is a rainy place. C. It is a windy place. D. It is a place where people drive slowly. 7) How are people driving today? A. badly B. slowly C. very fast D. like they do not care 8) What does it mean if the roads are slippery? A. The roads are full of cars. B. The roads are easy to slide on. C. The roads are very long and curvy. D. The roads lead to a place with lots of snow.

55 Questions (continued): 9) Why does Dr. James clear the snow off his car quickly? A. He is very cold. B. He is late for work. C. He knows his patients are waiting. D. He knows he will have to drive slowly. 10) There is a lot of traffic on the road. Choose another way to write this sentence. A. There is a lot of snow on the road. B. There are a lot of cars on the road. C. There are a lot of accidents on the road. D. There are a lot of people walking on the road. 11) Why did the car have an accident? A. because it was snowing outside B. because Dr. James hit the car C. because it was so cold outside D. because the car slipped on a patch of ice 12) What is an accident? A. something that happens only with cars B. something that happens only in the snow C. something that happens that has not been planned D. something that happens because other people want it to 13) What is the weatherman right about? Check all that are correct. A. It is a windy day B. It is very cold outside. C. The roads are slippery. D. There will be an accident. 14) Why does Dr. James hurry from his car after the accident? A. He is very cold. B. He wants to get to the hospital. C. He is worried about his patients. D. He wants to make sure the people in the car are okay.

56 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A Day Like No Other Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Frank Wilcox has been chief of police in Lansett County for 25 years. He had just turned 30 when he took the job. He has seen murders. He has seen robberies. He has seen cats stuck in trees. He has found missing children. Today would be like no other. It is 11:00 at night. Chief Wilcox begins putting together his things. He is tired. He wants to go home. Chief Wilcox, calls an officer walking quickly into his office. It is Officer Simpson. He looks nervous. He looks like he would like to be anywhere else but there. What is it, Simpson? asks the Chief. Holman s Grocery was just held up at gun point, Simpson says. His voice is shaky. He coughs to clear his throat. Was anyone hurt? asks Chief. Lansett is a very small county. The Chief knows just about everyone who lives there. If anyone was hurt, there is a good chance he knows who it was. Maybe that's why Officer Simpson looks nervous. No one was hurt, says Simpson. But we caught the suspect. Ah, well, Simpson. You guys can take care of that. I m--, Chief Wilcox stops in mid-sentence. He understands what is wrong. From behind Officer Simpson, the Chief sees his youngest daughter, Devon. She is in handcuffs. Chief Wilcox gets a lump in his throat. He is in disbelief. How could it be? he thinks. Devon, will you please tell me what is going on? the Chief demands. Devon does not look at him. The Chief can feel anger growing inside of him. He refuses to let that anger show. Take her back for questioning, the Chief says to Officer Simpson in a calm voice. Devon, whatever you do, tell the truth, the Chief says. I m your dad. I love you. We will figure this out.

57 Questions: 1) What is the main problem in this story? A. Devon won't look at her dad. B. Officer Simpson is nervous. C. The Chief's daughter has been arrested. D. The Chief is tired and wants to go home. 2) How long has Wilcox been Chief? A. 3) What can the reader tell about Chief Wilcox? Check all that are correct. A. He has seen a lot in his job. B. He wants the truth. C. He is 30-years-old. D. He can stay calm even when he is angry. 4) Why does Chief want to go home? A. He is hungry. B. He is tired. C. He does not want to see Devon. D. He is worried about his family. 5) Why is Officer Simpson nervous? A. He is scared of Chief Wilcox. B. He has just been held up at gun point. C. He has just arrested Chief's daughter. D. He has just found an important piece of evidence in a new case. 6) Choose all that are correct. What does it mean to be shaky? A. to be loud B. to be hard to hear C. to be unsure and unsteady D. to be strong and uncontrollable 7) When does Chief know what is wrong with Officer Simpson? A. when he sees the gun B. when he stands up C. when Officer Simpson tells him D. when he sees his daughter 8) "He refuses to let that anger show." Which sentence below means the same thing? A. He is forced to let that anger show. B. He is about to let that anger show. C. He wants to let that anger show. D. He decides not to let that anger show.

58 Questions (continued): 9) Why might Devon have not looked at her father? A. She did not see him. B. She felt ashamed. C. The handcuffs hurt. D. She is the youngest daughter. 10) How do Chief's feelings change during the story? A. from tired, to disbelief, to anger, to love B. from tired, to love, to disbelief, to anger C. from tired, to love, to anger, to disbelief D. from tired, to anger, to disbelief, to love 11) How old is Chief? A. 12) Why might Chief feel different than any other parent about his child's arrest? A. Devon is a girl. B. Devon is his youngest child. C. He is a police officer. D. Devon may have had a gun. How do you think Chief should handle this case? Explain.

59 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A Happy Visitor Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. It is Thursday. It is raining today. It is a rainy day. Anna is inside the house. Anna is watching TV. Anna is watching TV inside the house. Anna cannot go outside. It is raining outside. Anna cannot go outside because it is raining outside. Anna is bored. Wait! Anna hears someone at the door. Someone is at the door of her house. Anna opens the door. What does Anna see? Anna sees a dog. The dog is small. Anna sees a small dog. The dog is wet. The dog is wet from the rain. "Awww! You are all wet!" Anna says to the dog. "You are very cute!" "Mom!" Anna says. "Yes dear?" says Anna's mom. "There is a dog here! There is a dog at the door!" Anna says. "What?" says Anna's mom. "A dog?" Anna's mom comes to the door. Anna's mom sees the wet dog. The wet dog looks cute. "Can we keep it?" asks Anna. "Yes, we can," says Anna's mom. The dog is happy.

60 Questions: 1) What is the name of the girl in the story? A. 2) What day of the week is it in the story? A. 3) What is at the door of the house? A. a man B. a cat C. a dog D. a snake 4) What happens at the end of the story? A. Anna keeps the dog. B. Anna takes the dog to the hospital. C. Anna s mom says she cannot keep the dog. D. Anna dries the dog with a towel. 5) Is the dog dry or wet? A. The dog is dry. B. The dog is wet. 6) How does the dog look? Check all that are correct. A. cute B. strong C. small D. angry Do you think Anna should keep the dog? Why or why not?

61 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A Mystery Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Something is very wrong, says the detective. I know! says Ms. Gervis. It is wrong that someone has stolen from me! The detective looks around Ms. Gervis apartment. That is not what I am talking about ma am. What is wrong is that I do not understand how the robber got in and out. Ms. Gervis and the detective stand in silence. Ms. Gervis is upset. The robber did not come through the window, says the detective. These windows have not been open or shut in months. The detective looks at the fireplace. The robber did not squeeze down here. The detective walks to the front door. He examines the latch. And the robber definitely did not use the front door. I have no idea how he did it, says a bothered Ms. Gervis. It is a big mystery. And you say the robber stole nothing else? asks the detective. No money, no jewelry, no crystal? That s right, detective. He took only what was important to me, Ms. Gervis says with a sigh. There is only one thing I can do now. And what is that? the detective asks with surprise. I will stop baking cakes, Ms. Gervis says. They are mine to give away. They are not for someone to steal. You can t do that! says the detective with alarm. Who will bake those delicious cakes? I am sorry. I do not know, says Ms. Gervis. I must solve this case immediately! says the detective.

62 Questions: 1) Where does this story take place? A. in a bakery B. at the police station C. in Ms. Gervis' house D. in Ms. Gervis' apartment 2) If Ms. Gervis is upset, which best describes how she would look? A. She might smile a lot. B. Her eyes might be teary. C. Her clothes might be dirty. D. She might be sitting down. 3) What makes the detective sure that the robber did not come through the window? A. The windows are locked. B. The window faces the police station. C. The windows have not been used in months. D. The windows are too small for a person to fit through. 4) "And the robber definitely did not use the front door." Choose the best way to rewrite this sentence. A. "And the robber may not have used the front door." B. "And the robber probably did not use the front door." C. "And the robber was not able to use the front door." D. "And the robber certainly did not use the front door." 5) Which questions should the detective have asked about the front door? Check all that are correct. A. Is the door old? B. Is the door made of wood? C. Does someone else have a key? D. Does Ms. Gervis leave the door unlocked? 6) What does Ms. Gervis do with her cakes? A. eats them B. sells them C. hides them D. gives them away

63 Questions (continued): 7) What does the detective seem to think will happen if he solves the mystery? A. Ms. Gervis will start baking cakes again. B. Ms. Gervis will bake him extra cakes. C. Ms. Gervis will give him her secret recipe. D. Ms. Gervis will give him money and jewels. 8) What is a mystery? A. something that is wrong B. something that happens at night C. something a robber leaves behind D. something that cannot be explained 9) What else was stolen from the apartment? A. crystal B. jewelry C. money D. nothing 10) If something is said with alarm, how is it said? A. with fear and panic B. with bells and whistles C. with smiles and laughter D. with sadness and tears Do you like mysteries? What is your favorite kind of story? Explain.

64 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Accused Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Elizabeth was brooding in her room. She had sought asylum there since spurious gossip began circulating about her at Seagrove Academy last week. Not that Elizabeth had ever been considered a social butterfly. She preferred to live vicariously through the brazen stories of her friends: late night partying, fraternizing with boys, childish pranks. Still, she has taken to being more by herself than usual since the allegations surfaced. Up for consideration for the highly coveted Blauvelt Award, a scholarship recognizing academic integrity and promise, an anonymous student had given headmaster Billings the tip that Elizabeth had cheated on several tests this year. The accusations were laughable. Elizabeth had long been a stellar student at Seagrove. She lacked a natural intelligence - this was true. However, she more than made up for this deficit through diligence and perseverance. Still, the accusations had given the recommendation committee pause. Elizabeth had been called to Mr. Billings grand office on Friday and asked copious questions about her recent exams. The experience was quite traumatic. Seagrove is an elite school. Most of its students come from privileged backgrounds. This was not the case for Elizabeth. Her family had little money. She attended Seagrove on a full scholarship. The Blauvelt Award would help her family pay for college. So, it was with the same diligence with which she applied herself to her studies that Elizabeth planned to unmask her accuser. She opened the school directory on her bed and began combing through the names. Seagrove was such a small and insular community. Twenty-one kids would be in her graduating class. Elizabeth knew it was inevitable that the person spreading rumors about her would come to light. It was just a matter of time.

65 Questions: 1) What is another word for spurious? A. shameful B. ghastly C. hurtful D. untrue 2) However, she more than made up for this deficit through diligence and perseverance." Choose the best way to paraphrase the above sentence. A. Elizabeth knew she needed to work hard to get the Blauvelt Award. B. Any cheating Elizabeth did was only because she lacked natural intelligence. C. Hard work and dedication helped make up for Elizabeth's lack of natural intelligence. D. Mediocre studying and work habits did not keep Elizabeth from doing well in school. 3) Which of the following could best be described as brazen? A. A dog chases a cat up into a tree. B. A man walks his dog during the rain. C. A woman steps in front of a bus to get it to stop. D. A little girl wins the National Spelling Bee with hard work. 4) Why would cheating have likely knocked Elizabeth out of the running for the Blauvelt Award? A. Mr. Billings said this was the case. B. Awards cannot be given to cheaters. C. The award is based on academic integrity. D. Cheating would have meant the award could not be used for college. 5) How is Elizabeth different than many of her peers? A. She is diligent. B. She is honest. C. She is not wealthy. D. She likes to be alone. 6) What does the reader learn about the kind of school Seagrove Academy is? A. a school for gifted students B. a school with many wealthy students C. a school where many kids lie and cheat D. a large school where it is hard to get to know people

66 Questions (continued): 7) What does the reader learn about the student who accused Elizabeth of cheating? Check all that are correct. A. That student does not want anyone to know who he or she is. B. That student is also a contender for the Blauvelt Award. C. That student is either lying or mistaken. D. That the student is a former friend of Elizabeth's. 8) What is the best antonym for inevitable? A. impossible B. unmistakable C. probable D. certain 9) Why is Elizabeth so sure that she will learn who has accused her of cheating? A. Her friends will help her. B. The community is so small. C. She thinks the person will come forward. D. She thinks it will be the recipient of the Blauvelt Award. 10) What was Elizabeth's first response to being accused? A. She became rabid. B. She became reclusive. C. She became vindicated. D. She became venerable. 11) Who is the antagonist in this passage? A. Elizabeth B. Mr. Billings C. the anonymous student D. the recommendation committee 12) Why is this award most likely so important to Elizabeth? A. It will prove she is smart. B. It will help her pay for college. C. It will make her parents proud. D. It will prove she did not cheat.

67 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Alligators Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. An alligator is a very big reptile. Alligators can grow to more than 15 feet long. An alligator has a long tail, stubby legs, very strong jaws and sharp teeth. It eats fish, mammals and birds. Alligators live in rivers and swamps where the weather is very warm. There are lots of alligators in Florida. Questions: 1) What kind of animal is an alligator? A. an amphibian B. a mammal C. a reptile 2) What does an alligator look like? Check all that are correct. A. It has long legs. B. It has a short tail. C. It has sharp teeth. 3) What do alligators eat? Check all that are correct. A. birds B. cats C. fish 4) What does stubby mean? A. big and juicy B. long and lean C. short and thick 5) Which is the best antonym for sharp? A. dull B. gray C. soft 6) What can the reader tell about Florida from this passage? A. It is far away. B. It is a very big place. C. It has rivers and swamps.

68 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 An Adventure Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Jaime is a boy. Jaime lives in a house. Jaime lives in the country. Jaime lives in a house in the country. Jaime has a dog. The dog is named Go-Go. Jaime and Go-Go are friends. Jaime and Go-Go are bored. They want to do something new. They want to do something fun. They want to do something exciting. Jaime and Go-Go walk out of the house. They walk across the yard. They walk across the field. They jump over the fence. Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of the mountain is in the clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain. We are going to the top of that mountain, Jaime says. Go-Go looks nervous. Don't be nervous, Jaime says. Go-Go runs after Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looks back at the house. I am a little tired, Jaime says to Go-Go. Go-Go licks Jaime s face. Jaime turns around. Come on Go-Go. We will climb the mountain tomorrow, Jaime says. Jaime starts to walk home. Go-Go runs after Jaime.

69 Questions: 1) Where does Jaime live? A. He lives in a house in the city. B. He lives in an apartment in the country. C. He lives in a house in the country. D. He lives in an apartment in the city. 2) What kind of animal is Go-Go? A. 3) What does across mean? A. under B. close to C. far away from D. from one side to the other side 4) What does Jaime want to do at the beginning of the story? A. go home B. climb a mountain C. go fishing in the river D. play a game with Go-Go 5) What does Jaime want to do at the end of the story? A. go home B. climb a mountain C. go fishing in the river D. play a game with Go-Go 6) Why is Go-Go nervous? A. He is hungry. B. He wants to play catch. C. He doesn t want to go home. D. He doesn t want to climb the mountain. 7) Jaime says he will climb the mountain tomorrow. Is this true? A. Probably. B. Probably not. Would you like to live in the city, or would you like to live in the country? Why? I would like to live in the because

70 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Ana Finds an Apartment Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Ana, her husband Mario, and their four-year-old son, Antonio, just moved to North Carolina. They need a temporary place to call home until they get settled into their new surroundings. Right now, they are staying in a hotel not far from Mario s job. Ana begins a search for an apartment for the family to live in. First, Ana picks up an Apartment Book at the local newspaper stand. The Apartment Book contains listings of all the major apartment complexes in her area. Ana starts by looking at the prices for apartments in the Apartment Book. Then, she reads about the amenities that each apartment complex offers. For example, some apartments have a clubhouse. Some have a gym, which is also called a fitness center. Some have a pool. Some have all of these! Ana notices that the more amenities an apartment complex has, the more it costs each month. She wants the family s new apartment to be nice, but she does not want to spend too much money on it. Ana and Mario are trying to save money to buy a house. After considering prices, amenities, and locations, Ana finds several apartment complexes that she thinks the family will like. Ana calls the apartment complexes. She sets up appointments with the apartment managers to see the apartments she thinks are interesting. Ana makes five phone calls in total. When Mario gets back to the hotel from work, Ana shows him the list of apartments. These look good, he says. The next day, while Mario is at work and Antonio is at childcare, Ana visits the apartment complexes. She likes the fifth one the best. It is in a good school district. It has a pool, but no fitness center or clubhouse. It is near Mario s job. Ana hopes to find a job nearby, as well. When Ana gets back to the hotel, she discusses all that she has seen with Mario. They decide to rent the last apartment Ana saw.

71 The next day, Ana calls the manager of the apartment complex with the news. The manager asks Ana and Mario to sign a lease and pay a security deposit. If the family damages the apartment in any way while they are living there, the security deposit will help to pay for the cost of repairs. Ana and Mario sign a lease and pay the money. The manager asks them when they plan to move in and Ana looks up at Mario. He looks back at her for a moment and then tells the manager, In a few days. Finally, they have a place to stay. Questions: 1) What kind of book does Ana get? A. a City Guide Book B. a Map Book C. a House Book D. an Apartment Book 2) What did Ana consider while looking through the Apartment Book? I. school districts II. amenities III. locations A. I only B. I and II C. II and II D. I, II, and III 3) Where is Ana's family staying while they look for a place to call home? A. in an apartment close to Mario s work B. at an apartment next to Antonio s school C. in Ana s mother s house D. in a hotel near Mario s work 4) What does Ana realize as she looks through the Apartment Book? A. that the nicest apartments are far away B. that all the apartments are small and cramped C. that it is easy to find a nice apartment in a good school district D. that the number of amenities is related to cost 5) Why doesn't Ana want to spend too much money on an apartment? A. her husband will get upset B. she does not have the money C. she cannot find one she likes D. she wants to save money for a house 6) In this story, which of the following is not mentioned as an amenity? A. carpet B. clubhouse C. fitness center D. pool

72 Questions (continued): 7) What makes Ana like the fifth apartment best? I. it has many amenities II. it is near Mario s job III. it is in a good school district A. I only B. I and II C. II and II D. I, II, and III 8) Where is Antonio while Ana looks at apartments? A. at daycare B. at the hotel C. at school D. at work 9) What does it mean to consider something? A. to rent it B. to think about it C. to make it happen D. to read a book about it 10) "When Ana gets back to the hotel, she discusses all that she has seen with Mario." How can we best rewrite the above sentence? A. When Ana gets back to the hotel, she reads about all that she has seen with Mario. B. When Ana returns to the hotel, she writes about all that she has seen with Mario. C. When Ana returns to the hotel, she talks about all that she has seen with Mario. D. When Ana leaves the hotel, she talks about all that she has seen with Mario. 11) When will the family move into their new apartment? A. in a day or two B. in a couple days C. in three or four days D. in just under a week 12) Which is the best description of a security deposit? A. money given to landlord to pay for amenities B. money given to landlord to pay for utilities and telephone C. money given to landlord to prove the tenant can pay rent on time D. money given to the landlord to pay for any damage to the apartment

73 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Bail Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The phone rang at Pratt Taylor s house at nearly three in the morning. Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark. He answered groggily after the fourth ring. Hello, Pratt mumbled into the receiver. Mr. Taylor. Thank goodness. I need your help. Pratt knew the voice, for sure. However, in his somnolent state, he could not quite place it. Mr. Taylor! the man said again in a raspy, loud whisper. I am in jail. I was allowed one phone call. I m calling you. Then, the fog cleared. Although nearly ten years had passed since their last encounter, Pratt was able to discern something familiar in this voice. It belonged to a boy named Martin Hall, easily one of the most brilliant math students he had ever had. But while Pratt recalled that Martin possessed an enviable acumen for math, he also had a knack for getting into trouble. Still, they had forged a strong student-teacher bond, and when Martin graduated from Linebrook High School, Pratt had told him, Call me if there is anything you ever need. So here it was the call in the middle of the night. Yes, Martin. Is that you? Yes, Mr. Taylor. Can you help? What do you need? Bail money. What did you do? We ll talk about that later. Can you get me one thousand bucks? Pratt knew he could, but he was hesitant. What had Martin done? What was Pratt getting himself into? Pratt s honor to his word helped make his decision. Yes, I can. Where shall I bring it?

74 I m at Jessup in Maryland. My brother will come by your place in the morning. Give the money to him, and he will come and bail me out. Ok. The decision would be one that would irk Pratt for a very, very long time. Questions: 1) "Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark. He answered groggily after the fourth ring." A. Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, he answered groggily after the fourth ring. B. Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, and answered groggily on the fourth ring. C. While Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, he answered groggily after the fourth ring. D. Pratt answered the phone groggily after the fourth ring, fumbling for the phone in the dark. 2) If someone is feeling somnolent, which best describes how he or she might act? A. irritated B. lethargic C. maniacal D. nimble 3) What does the author mean by the following sentence: "Then, the fog cleared."? A. the weather had finally improved B. a light had been turned on in the room C. something bad had happened to Martin D. Pratt had gained a new understanding 4) Which is the best antonym for acumen? A. distaste B. enlightenment C. inability D. uncertainty 5) Which is the best antonym for hesitant? A. comfortable B. decisive C. relaxed D. trusting

75 Questions (continued): 6) Which best explains why Pratt decided to get the money for Martin? A. Pratt had the money to give. B. Pratt believed Martin was innocent. C. Pratt had promised help many years ago. D. Pratt feared Martin would hurt him if he did not comply. 7) Which best describes the Martin who Pratt remembers? A. the smartest student he had ever had B. a straight A student with no work ethic C. a gifted student with a propensity for trouble D. a kid from a bad neighborhood trying to get out 8) How does Pratt's mood change from the beginning to end of passage? A. from sleepy, to forgetful, to giving B. from uncertain, to committed, to angry C. from groggy, to clearheaded, to regretful D. from proud, to reminiscent to ambivalent 9) What does the last line of this passage seem to suggest? A. that someone gets hurt B. that something bad happens C. that Martin's brother never shows up D. that Martin spent a very long time in jail 10) Which is the best antonym for irk? A. excite B. heal C. humble D. please If you were Mr. Taylor, would you have bailed Pratt out? Why or why not?

76 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 BB Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. When I was about 12-years-old, my older brother, James, smuggled a BB gun into the house. I m not quite sure where he got it. This was in 1938, during the Great Depression. He must have bartered for it with one of his friends. Having any form of weaponry in our home was strictly taboo. James brought me to his room and took the BB gun out of a shoebox in his closet. I was immediately enamored. He let me touch it and walk with it around the room. I fingered the trigger. Can I shoot it, Jamesie? I asked, hopefully. No way, James said, taking it from me and putting it back into its covert spot. I forgot about it for a while, but one day, when no one was home, I went into James' closet and took it out. For some unknown reason, I went to the front window of the second floor in our row house. I cracked the window open. I pointed the gun outside and shot. I quickly shut the window and peeked outside. In a matter of seconds, old Mr. Schlosberg came out of his grocery store. He looked back at his store window. He looked up the street. He looked down the street. Then he looked straight across to our house. He could tell from the trajectory just where that shot had come from. He knew someone in our house was the culprit. I ran back to James' room to return the gun and then sat downstairs, waiting nervously for someone to get home. Thankfully, Jamesie made it home before Mother or Father. As he stepped through the door, I could hear old Mr. Schlosberg call his name. James, James, he called. Come here, son. I crept to look out the door and saw Mr. Schlosberg pointing feverishly at our house (up to the second floor window!) and then at his shop window. James ran back across the street and into the living room. I had retreated into the kitchen.

77 Alma! he screamed. Get out here! You cracked Mr. Schlosberg s window with my BB gun! Oh, please, Jamesie, I begged. Don t let him tell Mother. She will whip my bottom real good! Jamesie sighed. He wiped my tears and went back across the street to Mr. Schlosberg s. I don t know what James said to that man, but there was never a mention of the incident again. I didn't know how I got out of it, but I got out of it, and that was all that mattered to me then. I was too self-absorbed to realize what a great brother I had. Years later, I found out Jamesie had used the money he got from his newspaper route to pay for Mr. Schlosberg s cracked window. He only got one cent for every paper he delivered. He managed to pay the debt off just before he went off to fight in World War II. Since that day, I have never touched a gun. A BB gun, a water gun, a real gun, or any other type. Questions: 1) Which is the best reason the author may have included the detail of this story taking place during the Great Depression? A. to let the reader know how old the narrator is now B. to let the reader know why guns were taboo in the house C. to let the reader know that World War II had not occurred yet D. to let the reader know how economically strained things were 2) Which is the best antonym for enamored? A. bored B. generous C. repulsed D. scared 3) What does being strictly taboo suggest? A. It is illegal. B. It is forbidden. C. It is incomprehensible. D. Superstition surrounds it. 4) What does it mean to put something in a covert place? A. to put in the dark B. to put out of sight C. to put it in a secret place D. to put in a hard-to-find spot

78 Questions (continued): 5) How did the incident seem to affect Alma? Check all that are correct. A. It made her wary of guns. B. It made her appreciative of her brother. C. It made her sure her brother would be a good soldier. D. It made her trust her brother more than her parents. 6) A culprit is always... A. guilty. B. nervous. C. obedient. D. dangerous. 7) Which is the best definition for trajectory? A. a bullet hole B. a deep crack C. a path a projectile takes D. a sound a gun makes when firing 8) What did Alma seem most worried about? A. getting caught by her brother B. getting spanked by her mother C. having to pay for the broken glass D. hiding the gun before her parents got home 9) What kind of brother does James appear to be? A. wealthy B. irrational C. protective D. foolhardy 10) What kind of 12-year-old girl did Alma appear to be? A. curious and selfish B. feisty and indignant C. humble and loving D. reverent and respectful Have you ever done something you regretted? Explain.

79 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading The Flu The flu is the common name for influenza. The flu is a respiratory sickness. The flu can be mild. The flu can be bad. Sometimes the flu can even cause death. Each year in the U.S., 5% - 20% of people get the flu. Each year in the U.S., up to 60 million people get the flu. Each year in the U.S., about 200,000 people go to the hospital because of the flu. Each year in the U.S., about 36,000 people die from problems related to the flu. The flu is caused by a virus. A virus is a germ. People can spread the virus. The virus can live in tiny drops of liquid. If you have the virus, you can spread it by coughing. You can get the virus by touching a something that has the virus on it and then touching your eyes, nose, or mouth. A flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also prevent the flu. The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. Talk to your doctor about getting a vaccine. You can get information about the flu shot and nasal spray from your local health department. If you get the flu, you might get a headache. You might have a fever. You might have a cough and a runny nose. You might have a sore throat. You might feel very tired. Your body might hurt all over. Some people have diarrhea and vomiting. You can help stop the spread of the flu virus. The Centers for Disease Control remind you to cover your cough. You should cough into a tissue and throw the tissue away. Or you can cough into the inside of your elbow, into your own clothing. The Centers for Disease Control also remind you to clean your hands. You can use hand sanitizer. You should use an alcoholbased hand sanitizer for the best results. You can use soap and water. You should wash your hands with warm water and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands. Be sure to wash under your fingernails and between your fingers.

80 Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) At least 5% of the U.S. population gets the flu each year. II) There are three types of flu vaccine. III) Each year in the U.S., about 20% of people who have the flu die from it. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. What is the main idea of the fifth paragraph? A) How to wash your hands B) How long to wash your hands C) How to stop the spread of the virus D) What studies have shown about hand-washing E) Why you should cough into your elbow 3. In line 11, vaccine most closely means A) nose B) health C) protection D) shot E) spray

81 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is A. I) Correct. Lines 2-3 state that Each year in the U.S., 5% -20% of people get the flu. Therefore, the lowest percentage of people who gets the flu in the U.S. each year is 5%. That means that at least 5% of the U.S. population gets the flu each year. II) Incorrect. Lines state that The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. The flu shot and the nose spray comprise two types of vaccine. While there may be three or more types of vaccine, only two types of vaccine are mentioned in the passage. III) Incorrect. Line 3 states that Each year in the U.S., up to 60 million people get the flu. Lines 4-5 state that Each year in the U.S., about 36,000 people die from problems related to the flu. Twelve million is 20% of 60 million. Since up to 60 million people in the U.S. have the flu each year, 12 million people in the U.S. would be about 20% of the people in the U.S. who have the flu. Since about 36,000 people die from problems associated with the flu, the statement is not correct. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. While lines state that You should wash your hands with warm water and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands. Be sure to wash under your fingernails and between your fingers, this procedure is outlined as a recommendation of the Centers for Disease Control as a method of stopping the spread of the flu, not as the main idea of the paragraph. B) Incorrect. While lines state that You should wash your hands with warm water and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands, this procedure is outlined as a recommendation of the Centers for Disease Control as a method of stopping the spread of the flu, not as the main idea of the paragraph. C) Correct. Line 16 states that You can help stop the spread of the flu virus. The passage then outlines methods of stopping the spread of the virus. These include coughing into a tissue and throwing the tissue away (line 17), coughing into the inside of your elbow (line 18), and cleaning your hands (line 19). The remainder of the paragraph outlines the recommended methods of cleaning your hands. D) Incorrect. While lines state that Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands, the passage gives this information to support the main idea that you can help stop the spread of the virus (line 16), and that one way of stopping the spread of the virus is by cleaning your hands (line 19). E) Incorrect. While lines state Or you can cough into the inside of your elbow, into your own clothing, the reason for coughing into your elbow is not given.

82 3. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. Lines state that The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. Since the nose spray is a vaccine, the word vaccine cannot mean nose. B) Incorrect. Lines state, The flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also prevent the flu. The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. Talk to your doctor about getting a vaccine. Since the shot and the nose spray can prevent the flu, they are items which can promote health. However, they are not health itself. Therefore, the vaccine is not health itself, but a way of promoting good health. C) Correct. Lines state, The flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also prevent the flu. The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. Since the shot and the nasal flu mist can both prevent the flu, and both the shot and the nasal flu mist are vaccines, it stands to reason that the vaccine can protect against the flu. Therefore, the vaccine is a form of protection from the flu. D) Incorrect. Line 11 states that The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. While the shot is one type of vaccine, it is not the only vaccine, and there is no statement in the text that all shots are vaccines. E) Incorrect. Line 11 states that The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. While the spray is one type of vaccine, it is not the only vaccine, and there is no statement in the text that all sprays are vaccines.

83 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading Nuts There is a small difference between nuts and seeds. Many seeds often are called nuts. For example, hazelnuts are nuts. Chestnuts are nuts. Beechnuts are nuts. Acorns are nuts. But, Brazil Nuts are not nuts. Cashews are not nuts. Peanuts are not nuts. Pistachios are not nuts. So what are nuts? A true nut is a fruit with one seed. True nuts have very hard shells. True nuts do not open on their own. You must crack a true nut to open it. Cooks often call seeds nuts. In addition, English speakers often call seeds, nuts. The difference between nuts and seeds is small, so it is not necessarily wrong to call a seed a nut. Nuts are good for your health. Seeds are also good for your health. Nuts and seeds contain a lot of oil. They also contain a lot of energy for your body. Nuts are a good snack food. Seeds are also a good snack food. Nuts are good for the heart. Seeds are also good for the heart. Nuts help you grow. Seeds also help you grow. Nuts are good for the skin. Seeds are also good for the skin. Many animals eat nuts. Squirrels eat nuts. Mice eat nuts. Chipmunks eat nuts. Raccoons eat nuts. Birds eat nuts. Even some dogs eat nuts. Many animals eat seeds. Birds eat seeds. Mice eat seeds. Even some snakes eat seeds. There are hundreds of nuts that people and animals can eat. There are hundreds of seeds that people and animals can eat. But many nuts and seeds are inedible. Look in a book or check on the internet before trying to eat unfamiliar seeds and nuts. Learn if new foods are safe and healthful by reading about them before tasting them. Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) Cashews are true nuts. II) A nut is a fruit. III) True nuts do not open naturally. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. What is the main idea of the third paragraph? A) Many cooks do not understand what nuts are. B) In normal speech, some seeds are called nuts. C) Seeds are nuts, but nuts are not seeds. D) Nuts and seeds are small. E) The English language uses the wrong words for seeds. 3. In line 17, inedible most closely means A) familiar B) not good for health C) not able to be eaten D) unbelievable E) safe to eat

84 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is E. I) Incorrect. Line 3 states that Cashew nuts are not nuts. II) Correct. Line 4 states that A true nut is a fruit with one seed. III) Correct. Line 5 states that True nuts do not open on their own. Since they do not open on their own, they do not open naturally. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is B. A) Incorrect. While line 6 states that Cooks often call seeds nuts, it does not state that cooks do not understand what nuts are. It is a statement of language use, not a statement of knowledge. Since it is an incorrect interpretation of the sentence, it is not the main idea of the paragraph. B) Correct. Line 6 states that English speakers often call seeds, nuts. C) Incorrect. Lines 6-7 state that difference between nuts and seeds is small. There is nothing which says that seeds are nuts. So this cannot be the main idea of the paragraph. D) Incorrect. While it may be true that most nuts and seeds are small, the sentence in lines 6-7 actually states that the difference between nuts and seeds is small. So this is not the main idea of the paragraph. E) Incorrect. Lines 6-7 state that In addition, English speakers often call seeds, nuts. The difference between nuts and seeds is small, so it is not necessarily wrong to call a seed a nut. 3. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. Since the following sentence (lines 17-18) reminds readers to Look in a book or check on the internet before trying to eat unfamiliar seeds and nuts. If the seeds and nuts are unfamiliar, they cannot be familiar. So the word inedible cannot mean familiar. B) Incorrect. Lines remind readers to Learn if new foods are safe and healthful To learn if foods are healthful means to learn whether foods are good for health. Checking whether they are good for health means that it is unknown whether the food is good for health or not. C) Correct. Inedible food is food that is unable to be eaten. D) Incorrect. The word inedible is similar to the word incredible, which means unbelievable. The word incredible is not used in this reading passage. E) Incorrect. Lines remind readers to Learn if new foods are safe and healthful To learn if foods are safe means that it is unknown whether the foods are safe or not. So the word inedible cannot mean safe.

85 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading Paper 5 10 Paper has many uses. People draw on paper. People paint on paper. People write on paper. People clean with paper. People make boxes out of paper. People blow their noses on paper. Books are made of paper. Magazines are made of paper. Some money is printed on paper. Sandpaper is made of paper. Wallpaper is made of paper. Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. Some paper is made from bamboo. Some paper is made from wheat. Most paper is made from trees. 95% of paper is made from trees. Some paper is made from pine trees. Some paper is made from oak trees. Some paper is made from maple trees. Some paper is recycled. When paper is recycled, new paper is made from old paper. Some people say they work in paper-free offices. Some people think computers will take away the need for paper. But people will always need to blow their noses. People will want to sand surfaces with sandpaper. People will want to paint or draw on paper. People will want to put things in paper boxes. So, people will probably need to use paper for many more years. Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) Ninety-five percent of paper is made from pine trees. II) Computers will take away the need for paper. III) There will probably always be uses for paper. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. What is the main idea of the second paragraph? A) What is made of paper B) What paper is made of C) What people think of paper D) The many uses of paper E) The future of paper 3. In line 12, sand most closely means A) grainy mineral B) paint or color C) polish or smooth D) use for storage E) draw

86 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is C. I) Incorrect. According to line 7, Ninety five percent of paper is made from trees. Some paper is made from pine trees. II) Incorrect. According to lines 10-11, Some people think computers will take away the need for paper. So while it might be true that computers will take away the need for paper, the passage states that it is some people s opinion, not a fact. III) Correct. According to lines 13-14, People will probably always need to use paper. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is B. A) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of. For example, according to line 5, Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. The first paragraph tells what is made of paper. According to lines 3-4, Books are made of paper. Magazines are made of paper. B) Correct. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of. For example, according to line 5, Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. C) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of. For example, according to line 5, Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. The third paragraph contains some information about what people think. For example, according to lines 10-11, Some people think computers will take away the need for paper. D) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of. For example, according to line 5, Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. The first paragraph tells about the many uses of paper. For example, according to line 1, Paper has many uses. People draw on paper. People paint on paper. E) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of. For example, according to line 5, Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. The third paragraph discusses the future of paper. For example, according to lines 10-11, Some people think computers will take away the need for paper. But people will always need to blow their noses. 3. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. In lines 11 12, the word sand is used as a verb. According to the passage, Some people will want to sand surfaces with sandpaper. While the word sand does sometimes refer to a mineral, that usage of sand is a noun, not a verb. So in this case, the word sand cannot mean a grainy mineral. B) Incorrect. While it is true that people paint or color on surfaces and that there is a reddish brown color which is called sand, paint or color is probably not the meaning of

87 sand as it is used in this line, because the following sentence states that Some people will want to paint or draw on paper. C) Correct. The meaning of sand in this sentence is to smooth or polish. Since sandpaper has a rainy surface, it smoothes or polishes other surfaces when it is rubbed against them. D) Incorrect. Since the third paragraph contains a listing of possible future uses of paper, storage does appear as one of the possible uses. However, it appears in line 13 Some people will want to put things in paper boxes. Since putting things in boxes is storing things, this is the sentence where storage is listed. So it is unlikely that sand means use for storage. E) Incorrect. Since the third paragraph is a listing of possible future uses of paper, drawing on paper does appear as one of the possible future uses. However it is used in lines 13-14, Some people will want to paint or draw on paper. So sand probably does not refer to drawing.

88 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading Soaps and Detergents Soaps and detergents are used for washing. Soaps and detergents are used for cleaning. People usually use detergent to wash clothes. People usually use detergent to wash dishes. People usually use soap to wash their bodies. Soap has a long history. There was soap in Ancient Babylon. There was soap in Ancient Egypt. Some people think there was soap before people wrote history. Soap and detergent are similar, but soap and detergent are not exactly the same. Soaps are made of natural products. Detergents are made of man-made products. In some cases, soap is better than detergent. For example, soap is milder on the skin. Soap is milder on the environment. Soap is biodegradable nature s processes clean soap up. Soap does not build up in rivers. Soap does not cause pollution in rivers. Soap does not build up in streams. Soap does not cause pollution in streams. In some cases, detergent is better than soap. For example, soap builds up in clothes after many washings. Detergent does not build up in clothes after many washings. Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time. Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) Soap is made of natural or man-made products. II) Detergents are less mild than soaps. III) Detergent washes out of clothing. IV) A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. What is the main idea of the fifth paragraph? A) How soaps and detergents are made B) What soap and detergent are used for C) Which product causes less pollution D) How soap loses its cleaning power E) When detergent is better than soap 3. In line 9, biodegradable most closely means A) man-made B) dangerous C) permanent D) easy to clean up E) hard to clean up

89 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is E. I) Incorrect. Line 7 states that Soaps are made of natural products. Detergents are made of man-made products. II) Correct. Lines 8-9 state that For example, soap is milder on the skin. Soap is milder on the environment. Since soap is milder than detergent, detergent is less mild than soap. III) Correct. Line 14 states that Detergent does not build up in clothes after many washings. Since detergent does not build up, or stay, in clothing, it must wash out. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is E. A) Incorrect. Line 7 in the third paragraph explains how soap and detergent are made of different products, when it states that Soaps are made of natural products. Detergents are made of man-made products, the fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time. B) Incorrect. While lines 1-2 explain the uses of soaps and detergents when they state that Soaps and detergents are used for washing. Soaps and detergents are used for cleaning, the fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time. C) Incorrect. While lines 9-11 explain that soap causes less pollution when they state that Soap is milder on the environment. Soap is biodegradable nature s processes clean soap up. Soap does not build up in rivers. Soap does not cause pollution in rivers. Soap does not build up in streams. Soap does not cause pollution in streams, the fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time. D) Incorrect. While line 14 states that Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time, it does not tell how soap loses its cleaning power. E) Correct. The fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time. 3. The correct answer is D.

90 A) Incorrect. Since line 7 states that Soaps are made of natural products, and line 9 states that Soap is biodegradable, the word biodegradable cannot mean man-made. B) Incorrect. Since lines 8-9 state that soap is milder on the skin. Soap is milder on the environment, and line 9 states that Soap is biodegradable, the word biodegradable cannot mean dangerous. C) Incorrect. Since lines 9-10 state that nature s processes clean soap up, the word biodegradable cannot mean permanent. D) Correct. Since lines 9-10 state that nature s processes clean soap up, the word biodegradable probably means easy to clean up. E) Incorrect. Since lines 9-10 state that nature s processes clean soap up, the word biodegradable probably doesn t mean hard to clean up.

91 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading The Sun The sun is a star. The sun is at the center of the solar system. The sun is the largest object in the solar system. It is more than 99.8% of the mass of the solar system. More than one million earths could fit inside the sun! From earth, the sun looks like a yellow ball in the sky. A long time ago, people didn t know what the sun was. Many people told stories about the sun. People in many countries told stories about the sun. In some stories, people said the sun was a god. Some people gave names to the sun. The Greeks named it Helios. The Romans named it Sol. The name Solar System comes from the Roman name Sol. The sun is very hot. On the surface, it is about 5,510 Celsius. That s equal to about 11,000 Fahrenheit. The inside of the sun is even hotter. The core of the sun is 15,000,000 C! That s 27,000,000 F! The light from the sun is very bright. People must not look directly at the sun. Looking directly at the sun will hurt your eyes. People need the sun s heat and light to live. Animals need the sun s heat and light to live. Plants need the sun s heat and light to live. Plants make food with sunlight. People and animals eat the plants. Plants also use the sun to make oxygen. People and animals need to breathe oxygen. Today people do not tell stories about the sun. Today people do not think the sun is a god. But, people know that the sun is necessary for life on earth. Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) The sun is over a million times brighter than the earth. II) Some people used to think the sun was a god. III) The sun s surface is cooler than its core. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The main idea of the second paragraph is to explain A) what the sun is. B) what the sun looks like. C) how people reacted to the sun. D) who the Greeks and Romans were. E) who did not know what the sun was. 3. In line 10, core most closely means A) center B) gas C) oxygen D) surface E) temperature

92 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is E. I) Incorrect. While lines 2-3 state that more than a million earths could fit inside the sun, there is no mention there that the sun is a million times brighter than the earth. And while line 12 states that the light from the sun is very bright, it does not compare the brightness of the sun to the brightness of the earth. So while the sun may be a million times brighter than the earth, there is no such statement in the passage. II) Correct. Line 6 states that in some stories, people said the sun was a god. III) Correct. Lines 9-11 state that the surface temperature is 5510 C or 11,000 F, whereas the core, or inside of the sun is 15,000,000 C or 27,000,000 F. So the surface of the sun is much cooler than its core. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. While lines 4-5 state that a long time ago, people didn t know what the sun was, there is no explanation in paragraph 2 of what the sun is. B) Incorrect. While line 4 states that from earth, the sun looks like a yellow ball in the sky, this information is given only as background information, not as the main idea of the paragraph. C) Correct. The first sentence of the paragraph tells what the sun looks like. The remainder of the paragraph tells about people s reactions to the sun that they didn t know what it was, that they told stories about it; also that some people thought it was a god, and that some people named it. D) Incorrect. While line 6 states The Greeks named it Helios. The Romans named it Sol, there is no explanation of who the Greeks and Romans were. E) Incorrect. While lines 4-5 state that a long time ago, people did not know what the sun was, there is no mention of the specific people who did not know what it was. While lines 6-7 state that the Greeks and Romans gave names to the sun, the passage does not specify that they did not know what the sun was. 3. The correct answer is A. A) Correct. Lines 9 and 10 compare the surface temperature of the sun with the temperature of its core: The inside of the sun is even hotter. The core of the sun is 15,000,000 C! B) Incorrect. While the sun is made of gas, in this passage, the gas is not mentioned. Instead, this section compares the surface of the sun to the core of the sun. Since both the surface and the core would be made of the same material, the meaning gas would not make sense for the word core.

93 C) Incorrect. Lines 9 and 10 compare the surface temperature of the sun with the temperature of its core. Lines state that plants use sunlight to make oxygen, not that the sun itself is made of oxygen. D) Incorrect. Lines 9-10 compare the temperature of the surface of the sun with the temperature of the core. Since the comparison is made between the surface and the core, the word core could not mean surface. E) Incorrect. Lines 9-10 compare the heat level (which is the temperature) of the surface of the sun with the heat level of the core of the sun. Since the comparison is being made of the temperature of the surface and the temperature of the core, the word core could not mean temperature.

94 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Critical Reading - Water Water is the most common liquid in the world. Lakes contain water. Rivers contain water. Ponds contain water. Canals contain water. Oceans contain water. The water in rivers, ponds, and canals is fresh water. The water in oceans is salt water. About 70% of the world is covered by water. About 97% of water in the world is salt water. Only 3% of the world s water is fresh water. Fresh water is not salty. People usually think of water as a liquid. But water freezes to form a solid. The solid is called ice. And water boils to form a gas. The gas is called steam or vapor. Clouds are made of water. Water falls from clouds as rain. When it is cold, water falls as snow. Sometimes water falls as sleet. Sleet is partly water and partly ice. Sometimes water falls as hail. Hail is ice. People need water to live. Animals need water to live. Insects need water to live. Plants need water to live. All living things in the world need water to live. People all over the world need to drink clean water to live. About one billion people in the world do not have clean drinking water. The largest cause of preventable human death in the world is drinking water that is unsanitary. Questions 1. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true? I) Ninety-seven percent of snow is made of salt water. II) The largest cause of preventable human death is drinking water that is unsanitary.. III) About 1,000,000,000 people in the world do not have clean water to drink. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. What is the main idea of the first paragraph? A) Fresh water is necessary for life. B) Most water in the world is salt water. C) Water is the most common liquid in the world. D) People cannot drink most of the world s water. E) Only 3% of the world s water is not salt water. 3. In line 15, unsanitary most closely means A) not available B) not clean C) not in liquid form D) used for another purpose E) salty

95 Answers and Explanations 1. The correct answer is E. I) Incorrect. While line 3 states that 97% of the world s water is salty, there is no information in the passage concerning the amount of salt, if any, in snow. II) Correct. Lines state that the largest cause of preventable human death is drinking water that is unsanitary. Unsanitary means not clean. III) Correct. Lines state that one billion people in the world do not have clean drinking water. One billion is the written form of the number 1,000,000,000. A) I only B) II only C) III only D) I and II only E) II and III only 2. The correct answer is C. A) Incorrect. While the last paragraph states that water is necessary for life, this information is not given in the first paragraph. B) Incorrect. While line 3 states that most of the world s water is salt water, this is not the main idea of the paragraph. C) Correct. The first sentence of the paragraph states that water is the most common liquid in the world. Lines 2-4 expand that idea. Therefore, it is the main idea of the paragraph. D) Incorrect. While it is true that people do not drink salt water, and it is true that 97% of the world s water is saltwater, as stated in line 3, this information is not stated in paragraph 1. E) Incorrect. While lines 3-4 state that only 3% of the world s water is not salty, this information is given as support for the main idea that water is the most common liquid in the world. 3. The correct answer is B. A) Incorrect. While it is possible that water is not available to people in many places in the world because only 3% of the world s water is not salty, there is no mention in the passage that water is not available. B) Correct. Unsanitary water is not clean. C) Incorrect. While lines 5-9 give information about water that is not in liquid form, there is no mention that these forms of water would cause death. D) Incorrect. Although it is true that water is used for many purposes other than drinking, there is no mention of these purposes in the passage. E) Incorrect. While lines 2-4 discuss salt water, and while drinking salt water may cause death, there is no mention in the passage that salt water causes death.

96 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues Country Life City Life Henry: Hi Henry! How is life in the country? Davie: Hey Davie. Life in the country is fine. How is life in the city? Henry: It s great. I love the trees, flowers, birds, and insects. Davie: Insects!? Eww, that s gross. Henry: Well, how is life in the city? Davie: It s great. I love the buildings, cars, streets, and bright lights. Henry: Bright lights!? I hate bright lights! Davie: Yeah but in the city I can take the subway to work. I don t even have to drive. Henry: That s nice. But, in the country I work on a farm near my house so I don t have to drive either. I walk to work. Davie: Doesn t that hurt your feet? Henry: Sometimes, but its worth it because I get to eat food the comes straight from the farm. Davie: Mmmm, food from the farm sounds good. I wonder if it is better than the food you can eat at restaurants in the city!

97 Questions: 1) Who lives in the city? A. Henry B. Davie C. Both Henry and Davie D. Neither Henry nor Davie 2) What does Davie think is gross? A. Birds B. Insects C. Flowers D. Trees 3) What does Henry hate? A. Buildings B. Cars C. Streets D. Bright lights 4) How does Davie get to work? A. She drives a car B. She takes the bus C. She takes the subway D. None of the above 5) How does Henry get to work? A. He drives a tractor B. He rides a horse C. He drives a lawn mower D. None of the above Vocabulary: 1) If something is gross, it is A. tasty. B. disgusting. C. ready. D. A and B. 2) If a light is bright, it is A. dark. B. low. C. strong. D. none of the above. 3) When Henry says, I don t have to drive either, he means that A. he likes to drive. B. he also has to drive to work. C. he also does not have to drive to work. D. none of the above. 4) If an action is worth it A. the value of doing that action is high enough. B. the action has no value. C. the action is old. D. the action is boring. 5) When you wonder, you A. play. B. think. C. imagine. D. B and C. E. None of the above.

98 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues How are You Julia: Hi Anita. How are you? Anita: I am fine, thanks. How are you? Julia: I feel bad. I think I am sick. Anita: Hmm, that is not good. Julia: Yes, I know. Anita: Well, I think you should try to relax. Julia: Okay. Anita: I hope you feel better soon. Julia: Yeah, I do too! Questions: 1) How does Julia feel? A. Good B. Bad C. Sick D. B and C 2) What does Anita think Julia should do? A. Exercise B. Eat something C. Drink something D. Relax Vocabulary: 1) Relax means. A. exercise. B. rest. C. study. D. none of the above. 2) Soon is. A. now. B. a long time from now. C. a short time from now. D. never.

99 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues Tie Your Shoes! Dad: Tie your shoes! Michael: Okay, Dad. I will. Mom: Tuck in your shirt! Michael Okay, Mom. I will. Sister: Empty the trash! Michael: Okay, Sis. I will. Grandmother: Make your bed! Michael: Okay, Grandma. I will. Grandfather: Do your homework! Michael: Okay, Grandpa. I will. Hey, Little Brother! Little Brother: Me? Michael: Yes, you! Tie your shoes! Questions: 1) What does Mom want Michael to do? A. Tie his shoes B. Make his bed C. Tuck in his shirt D. Do his homework 2) Who is probably the youngest person? A. Michael B. Sister C. Little Brother D. Grandma Vocabulary: 1) Tuck in your shirt means A. put the bottom of your shirt inside your pants. B. button the top of your shirt around your neck. C. wear a clean shirt. D. fold your shirt. 2) When something is empty, it A. is full. B. has nothing in it. C. is heavy. D. none of the above.

100 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues What time is it? Julio: Hey Yoko. Do you know what time it is? Yoko: No, sorry. Ask Bob. Julio: Hey Bob. Do you know what time it is? Bob: No man, sorry. Ask Roger. Julio: Okay. Hey Roger, do you know what time it is? Roger: Well, I did this morning, but then I forgot. Sorry. Ask Lola. Julio: Okay, fine. Hey Lola, what time is it? Lola: I do not know. That is a good question. Let me know if you find out please. Julio: Gosh! Does anybody know what time it is? Questions: 1) What time is it? A. 10:30 B. 11:00 C. Nobody knows D. Noon 2) How many people are in this story? A. Two B. Three C. Four D. Five Vocabulary: 1) If you ask someone, you. A. question someone. B. answer someone. C. A and B. D. none of the above. 2) Roger forgot the time. So, Roger the time now. A. knows B. used to know C. does not know D. B and C

101 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues Where Are My Glasses? Ahmad: I can t find my glasses. Uli: Have you looked on the kitchen table? Ahmad: Yes, I ve looked there. Uli: Have you checked your desk? Ahmad: Yes, I ve checked there. Uli: Have you looked next to the computer? Ahmad: They re not there. Mo: Hi Dad. Ahmad: Hi Mo. I m looking for my glasses. Mo: Have you checked on top of your head? Ahmad: Oh! There they are! Questions: 1) What is Ahmad doing? A. Looking for his checks B. Working in the kitchen C. Looking for his glasses D. Working at his desk 2) Who is Mo? A. Ahmad s dad B. Ahmad s son C. Uli s friend D. Uli s dad Vocabulary: 1) Uli asks if Ahmad has checked his desk. Checked means A. helped out. B. cleaned up. C. worked on. D. looked over. 2) Another way of saying next to is A. under. B. above. C. beside. D. between.

102 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Dialogues Where are my keys? Vanka: Hey Oni, do you know where my pen is? Oni: Yes, it is on your desk. Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Roger, do you know where my hat is? Roger: Yeah, it is on your bed. Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Dillan, do you know where my purse is? Dillan: Yeah, it is on the couch. Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Jonas, do you know where my belt is? Jonas: Yeah, it is in your room. Vanka: Okay thanks. Now I have everything I need. Now I can go to work. Oni: Hey Vanka, do you know where your car keys are? Vanka: No. Where are they? I need them! Questions: 1) Where is Vanka s purse? A. On her bed B. On the couch C. In her room D. None of the above 2) What is the last thing Vanka needs? A. Her pen B. Her hat C. Her purse D. Her belt E. Her keys Vocabulary: 1) Yeah and mean the same thing. A. no B. please C. yes D. A and B. 2) If Vanka has everything she needs, she has A. all of the things she needs. B. none of the things she needs. C. almost all of the things she needs. D. none of the above.

103 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions To do Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

104 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions How Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

105 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions To be Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

106 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions What Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

107 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions When Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

108 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions Where Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

109 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions Who Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

110 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Forming Questions Why Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

111 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Animals Part 1 Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) bird 2) B) fish C) dog 3) D) cat 4) E) lion 5) F) bear G) horse 6) H) elephant 7) I) tiger 8) 9)

112 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Animals Part 2 Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) butterfly 1) B) dolphin 2) C) fox 3) D) goose 4) E) koala 5) F) owl 6) G) rabbit H) shark I) wolf 7) 8) 9)

113 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Animals Part 3 Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) alligator B) camel 2) 3) C) giraffe D) kangaroo 4) E) lizard F) penguin 5) 6) G) whale H) zebra 7) 8)

114 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Clothing Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) shirt 2) B) pants C) jacket D) tie 3) 4) E) dress 5) F) shoes 6) G) belt H) suit 7) 8)

115 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Cooking Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) fork 2) B) spoon C) knife D) pot 3) 4) E) pan 5) F) refrigerator 6) G) microwave H) plate 7) 8)

116 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Food Part 2 Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) bell pepper 1) B) broccoli 2) C) potatoes 3) D) squash E) cucumbers F) cheese G) tomato H) eggs 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I) corn J) mushrooms 9) 10) K) strawberry 11)

117 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Food Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) apple 2) B) orange C) grapes 3) D) fish 4) E) chicken 5) F) beans G) peppers 6) H) bread 7) 8)

118 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Furniture Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) table 2) B) chair C) bookcase 3) D) sofa 4) E) dresser F) recliner 5) G) bed 6) H) desk 7) 8)

119 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Household Tools Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) shaver 1) B) tweezers 2) C) nail clipper 3) D) compass 4) E) can opener 5) F) goggles G) utility knife H) level I) duct tape J) paintbrush 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

120 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching School Tools Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. 1) A) pen 2) B) pencil C) ruler 3) 4) D) highlighter E) calculator F) scissors G) glue 5) 6) 7) 8) H) tape I) books J) markers 9) 10)

121 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching The Human Body Part 2 Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) tongue 1) B) teeth 2) C) heel 3) D) toes 4) E) finger F) elbow G) knee 5) 6) 7) H) shoulders I) hair J) chin 8) 9) 10)

122 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching The Human Body Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) legs B) neck 1) 2) C) arm 3) D) ear 4) E) eye 5) F) foot 6) G) hands H) lips 7) I) nose 8) 9)

123 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Matching Construction Tools Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures. A) tape measure 1) B) nail 2) C) hammer 3) D) screwdriver E) wrench F) drill G) pliers H) saw 4) 5) 6) 7) I) circular saw 8) 9)

124 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Sentence Completion Answer Key Worksheet #1 Worksheet #2 Worksheet #3 Worksheet #4 Worksheet #5 1. D 7. D 2. C 8. E 3. E 9. C 4. B 10. A 5. A 11. E 6. E 12. C 1. D 7. C 2. C 8. A 3. E 9. D 4. A 10. C 5. B 11. A 6. A 12. D 1. C 7. B 2. A 8. C 3. D 9. A 4. B 10. C 5. E 11. D 6. C 12. E 1. D 7. E 2. B 8. D 3. A 9. A 4. C 10. D 5. A 11. B 6. B 12. D 1. D 7. B 2. A 8. B 3. E 9. B 4. A 10. E 5. B 11. D 6. C 12. B Worksheet #6 Worksheet #7 Worksheet #8 Worksheet #9 Worksheet #10 1. D 7. C 2. B 8. A 3. C 9. E 4. E 10. D 5. D 11. E 6. A 12. A 1. C 7. B 2. A 8. A 3. D 9. E 4. C 10. E 5. E 11. D 6. A 12. C 1. D 7. B 2. A 8. A 3. E 9. C 4. C 10. A 5. A 11. D 6. E 12. B 1. C 7. E 2. A 8. D 3. E 9. D 4. B 10. E 5. C 11. E 6. A 12. D 1. D 7. A 2. D 8. C 3. D 9. D 4. E 10. A 5. D 11. A 6. B 12. E Worksheet #11 Worksheet #12 Worksheet #13 Worksheet #14 Worksheet #15 1. B 7. E 2. C 8. D 3. E 9. A 4. B 10. C 5. E 11. C 6. B 12. E 1. D 7. D 2. C 8. B 3. D 9. B 4. C 10. A 5. A 11. B 6. C 12. D 1. B 7. D 2. C 8. A 3. C 9. A 4. E 10. B 5. E 11. B 6. D 12. E 1. B 7. D 2. A 8. C 3. C 9. D 4. A 10. E 5. E 11. C 6. B 12. B 1. B 7. D 2. E 8. B 3. D 9. C 4. A 10. E 5. E 11. E 6. B 12. D Worksheet #16 1. C 7. A 2. E 8. B 3. D 9. C 4. B 10. E 5. C 11. E 6. D 12. C

125 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories My Family Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Hi, my name is Eric. I want to tell you about my family. I have two sisters. They are very nice. Their names are Rachel and Norma. Rachel is younger than me. She is twelve years old. Norma is older than me. She is eighteen. My mother is very pretty. Her name is Adel. She has a very good memory. She can remember all the names of the presidents of the United States. My father knows about very many things. He is an engineer. He builds bridges. We also have a dog in our family. His name is Paw. He is a German Shepard. He is very faithful to us. Advanced Version Hi, my name is Eric. I want to tell you about my family. I have two sisters. They are very nice. Their names are Rachel and Norma. Rachel is younger than me. She is twelve years old. Norma is older than me. She is eighteen. My mother is beautiful. Her name is Adel. She has a great memory. She can remember all the names of the presidents of the United States. My father is smart. He is an engineer. He builds bridges. We also have a dog in our family. His name is Paw. He is a German Shepard. He is very loyal.

126 Questions: 1. How old is Norma? 2. What can Adel remember? 3. What is the job of the father? 4. What kind of dog is Paw? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does beautiful mean? (paragraph 3, sentence 1) 2. What does great mean? (paragraph 3, sentence 3) 3. What does smart mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 1) 4. What does loyal mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 4)

127 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories An Adventure Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Jamie has a dog named Gogo. Jamie and Gogo are bored. They want to do something new. They want to do something fun. They want to do something exciting. Jamie and Gogo walk out of the house. They walk across the yard. They walk across the field. They jump over the fence. Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of the mountain is in the clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain. We are going to the top of that mountain, Jaime says. Gogo looks scared. Do not be scared, Jamie says. Gogo runs after Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looks back at their home. I am a little tired, Jaime says to Gogo. Gogo puts his tongue across Jaime s face. Jaime turns around and starts walking home. Come on Gogo. We will climb the mountain tomorrow, Jaime says. Advanced Version Jamie has a dog named Gogo. Jamie and Gogo are bored. They want go on an adventure. Jamie and Gogo walk out of the house. They walk across the yard. They walk across the field. They jump over the fence.

128 Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of the mountain is in the clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain. We re going to the top of that mountain, Jaime says. Gogo looks scared. Don t be scared, Jamie says. Gogo follows Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looks back at their home. I am kind of tired, Jaime says to Gogo. Gogo licks Jaime s face. Jaime turns around and starts walking home. C mon Gogo. We ll climb the mountain tomorrow, Jaime says. Questions: 1. Where does Jaime want to go? 2. Where does Jaime go? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does adventure mean? ( line 2) 2. What does follow mean? ( paragraph 8) 3. What does kind of mean? ( paragraph 9) 4. What does lick mean? (paragraph 9)

129 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories Happy Birthday Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday dear Jose. Happy birthday to you! the people at the party sang. Jose smiled and blew out the candles. How old are you Jose? Jessie asked. I am 29 Jose answered. Wait, are you telling the truth? Jessie asked. Yes, I am telling the truth. I am 29 years old. Jose answered. No he is not! He is 30! someone said in a loud voice. How do you know? Jessie asked. Because I am his mother! she answered. Advanced Version Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday dear Jose. Happy birthday to you! the people at the party sang. Jose smiled and blew out the candles. How old are you Jose? Jessie asked. I am 29 Jose replied. Wait, are you telling the truth? Jessie asked.

130 Yes, I am telling the truth. I am 29 years old. Jose replied. No he is not! He is 30! someone shouted. How do you know? Jessie asked. Because I am his mother! she replied. Questions: 1. How old is Jose? 2. How does the woman know the age of Jose? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does replied mean? (paragraph 4, 6, and 9) 2. What does shouted mean? (paragraph 7)

131 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories Oh No! Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version I woke up at 7:30. I was late. Oh no! I got to work. I did not get to the meeting in time. Oh no! I went to lunch. I did not know where my wallet was. Oh no! I came back home. It was raining. Oh no! I cooked dinner. I cooked the rice too much. Oh no! I ate dinner with my friends and family. We had a very good time. We laughed and talked together. I felt happy. Oh yes! Advanced Version I woke up at 7:30. I was late. Oh no! I got to work. I missed the meeting. Oh no! I went to lunch. I lost my wallet. Oh no! I returned home. It was raining. Oh no! I cooked dinner. I burned the rice. Oh no! I ate dinner with my friends and family. We had a great time. We laughed and talked together. I felt happy. Oh yes!

132 Questions: 1. What time did I wake up? 2. Why did I miss the meeting? 3. What tense is the story in: Past, Present, or Future? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does missed mean? ( line 2) 2. What does lost mean? ( line 3) 3. What does returned mean? ( line 4) 4. What does burned mean? ( line 5) 5. What does great mean? ( line 6)

133 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories What Do We Have to Eat? Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version I want to eat some food. Well, what do you want to eat? I do not know. What do we have to eat? Well, we have eggs, rice, beans, bread, ham, and cheese. Do we have any steak? No, we do not have any steak. Noooo! I want steak. Well, we do not have any steak. I told you what we have. Okay. Can I have some eggs and ham please. Sure. But wait! I want something to drink also! Advanced Version I am hungry. Well, what do you want to eat? I do not know. What do we have to eat? Well, we have eggs, rice, beans, bread, ham, and cheese.

134 Do we have any steak? No, we do not have any steak. Noooo! I want steak. Well, we do not have any steak. I told you what we have. Okay. Can I have some eggs and ham please. Sure. But wait! I am thirsty too! Questions: 1. What do we have to eat? 2. What do I want to eat? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does hungry mean? (line 1) 2. What does thirsty mean? (last line of the story) 3. What does too mean? (last line of the story)

135 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories A Call to the Pool Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Today it is very hot outside. How can I cool down? Maybe I can go swimming at the pool. I need to find out what time it opens. I will make a call. I pressed the numbers on the phone and waited. Ring. Ring. Hello, this is Andrea at the pool. How can I help you? Hi, I want to know what time the pool opens. Oh okay. The pool opens at 10:30 in the morning. Okay, thank you! You are welcome. Bye. Good bye. Great! It is 10:00 in the morning now. That means the pool will open in thirty minutes! Advanced Version Today it is very hot outside. How can I cool down? Maybe I can go swimming at the pool. I need to find out what time it opens. I will make a call. I dialed the phone and waited. Ring. Ring. Hello, this is Andrea at the pool. How can I help you?

136 Hi, I want to know what time the pool opens. Oh okay. The pool opens at 10:30 am. Okay, thank you! You are welcome. Bye. Good bye. Great! It is 10:00 am. That means the pool will open in half and hour! Questions: 1. Who answered the phone? 2. What time is the pool open? 3. What time is it now? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does dialed mean? (paragraph 2, sentence 1) 2. What does am mean? (paragraph 6, sentence 1) 3. What does half an hour mean? (the last line of the story)

137 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories An Overcast Day Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Hi, nice to meet you. My name is Tetsuo. Hi, nice to meet you as well. My name is James. How are you? I am fine, thank you. How are you? I am unhappy. Why are you unhappy? I am unhappy because it is dark and cloudy. I do not like this weather. Do not worry! Tomorrow it will be sunny! Advanced Version Hi, nice to meet you. My name is Tetsuo. Hi, nice to meet you as well. My name is James. How are you? I am fine, thank you. How are you? I am unhappy. Why are you unhappy? I am unhappy because it is overcast. I do not like this weather. Do not worry! Tomorrow it will be sunny!

138 Questions: 1. How is Tetsuo? 2. Why is James unhappy? 3. What will the weather be like tomorrow? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does overcast mean? ( sentence 6)

139 englishforeveryone.org Beginning Short Stories Who Knows My Name? Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story. Basic Version Let s play a game! My name starts with the letter J. Who knows my name? Is it Jennifer? No. Is it Janet? No. Those are good tries to get the answer. But you do not know it yet! The last letter in my name is A. Who knows my name? Is it Jessica? No. Is it Julia? Yes! That was a very good try. You win! Advanced Version Let s play a game! My name starts with the letter J. Who knows my name? Is it Jennifer? No. Is it Janet? No. Those are good guesses. But you do not know it yet! My name ends with the letter A. Who knows my name? Is it Jessica? No. Is it Julia? Yes! That was a great guess. You win!

140 Questions: 1. What was the first letter of her name? 2. What was the last letter of her name? 3. What was her name? Vocabulary: To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then, compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word. 1. What does guesses mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 1) 2. What does end mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 3) 3. What does great mean? (the last line of the story)

141 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Bella Hides Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Bella is hiding. She is behind the sofa with her pet puppy, Sir. Bella is hiding from her mom. She does not want to go to the doctor. Bella? calls Bella s mom in a sweet voice. Where are you? Bella s mom looks in the closet. She looks in the kitchen. She looks next to the bookcase. Bella always hides when she is scared. Bella is very quiet. Sir begins to jump around behind the sofa. Bella s mom hears the noise. She looks behind the sofa with a smile. She holds out her hand. Don t be scared, says Bella s mom. The doctor just wants to check your ears. Will I have to get a shot? asks Bella. No, says Mom. That makes Bella feel better. Bella grabs her mom s hand. They go to see the doctor. Questions: 1) Why is Bella hiding? Check all that are correct. A. She is playing a game. B. She does not want to go to the doctor. C. She is looking for her puppy. D. She is scared. 2) Who or what is hiding with Bella? A. Her mom B. Her sister C. Her pet puppy D. Her friend 3) Who is looking for Bella? A. 4) Where does Mom find Bella? A. in the kitchen B. in the closet C. next to the bookcase D. behind the sofa

142 Questions (continued): 5) How does Mom find Bella? A. Bella makes a noise. B. Dad helps Mom. C. Mom sees Bella's leg. D. The puppy makes a noise. 6) When does Bella hide? A. when she is bored B. when she is scared C. when she is happy D. all the time 7) What does Mom say will happen when Bella sees the doctor? A. Bella will get her ears checked. B. Bella will get a shot. C. Bella will get to bring her puppy. D. Bella will get her eyes checked. 8) How does Bella feel when Mom says she will not get a shot? A. angry B. better C. smart D. tired Have you ever been nervous about going to the doctor? Explain.

143 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My name is Olaf. Big City Noise Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I live in a big city. I live on a busy road. At night and during the day, cars go by. Buses go by. Trucks go by. People do not seem to hear the noise during the day. But at night, the noise makes it hard to sleep. My road has a lot of animals, too. People keep their animals outside in their yards at night. There are cats. There are dogs. The dogs make a lot of noise. To me, the dogs are like the trucks. The dogs are like the cars. The dogs are like the buses. All of them are loud! One dog barks more than the others do. His name is Simba. Simba is Mr. Cheek s dog. That is a very bad dog. He keeps me up at night, says Mr. Lucas. Mr. Lucas lives next door to Mr. Cheek. You should give him away, says Mr. Lucas. This makes Mr. Cheek very mad. "You should not sleep with your windows open," says Mr. Cheek. "You should take your dog inside at night," yells Mr. Lucas. The two men argue about Simba s barking almost every day. I think this is funny. To me, Simba is as bad as the cars. He is as bad as the buses. He is as bad as the trucks. This is what living in a big city is like. There is a lot of noise.

144 Questions: 1) In what place does Olaf live? A. 2) What does Olaf say makes noise? Check all that are correct. A. airplanes B. buses C. dogs D. horses 3) What goes by at night? A. bikes B. cats C. dogs D. trucks 4) Why may people NOT hear the noise during the day? A. because it is quiet B. because they are sleepy C. because they are busy doing other things D. because they do not hear well during the day 5) What does Olaf say about his road? Check all that are correct. A. It is dark. B. It is busy. C. It is dirty. D. It is noisy. 6) Which noise makes Mr. Lucas mad? A. cats meowing B. trucks going by C. a dog barking D. people talking 7) Who argues every day? A. Mr. Lucas and Olaf B. Olaf and Mr. Cheek C. Simba and Mr. Lucas D. Mr. Lucas and Mr. Cheek 8) What could Mr. Cheek do to help Mr. Lucas sleep? A. get a cat B. not argue with him C. not drive his car at night D. take his dog inside at night

145 Questions (continued): 9) What could Mr. Lucas do to sleep better? A. close his windows at night B. not argue with Mr. Cheek C. go to bed later D. talk to Olaf 11) Who does Mr. Cheek live next door to? A. Olaf B. Mr. Lucas C. Olaf and Mr. Lucas D. no one 10) Who says Simba is a bad dog? A. 12) What does Olaf mean when he says Simba is as bad as the buses? A. that Simba barks at the buses B. that Simba and the buses argue C. that Simba runs down the street at night D. that Simba and the buses both make noise 13) According to Olaf, what could be done about noise in a big town? A. People could ride bikes. B. Dogs could be inside. C. People could walk everywhere. D. Nothing can be done. Is it better to live in the city, or in the country? Why?

146 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 A bird is a kind of animal. Birds Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. A bird has two wings. Birds are the only animal with feathers. Pigeons, eagles, swans and blue jays are all kinds of birds. Most birds can fly. Turkeys and penguins are two kinds of birds that cannot fly. Questions: 1) What is this passage about? A. what birds are like B. why some birds can t fly C. where birds have feathers 2) What birds can fly? A. all birds B. most birds C. some birds 3) According to the passage, which of these birds cannot fly? A. eagles B. swans C. turkeys 4) All birds are. A. animals B. blue jays C. penguins Do you like birds? What is your favorite kind of bird? Why?

147 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Blizzard in Birmingham Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The Turner kids were not accustomed to snow. The most they ever got in their southern city of Birmingham was an inch or so each winter, and even that was quite infrequent. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses. No one knew how to drive in the stuff. It was never enough for young Lily Mae Turner, though, because the snow that came was always too sparse to build a snowman or to go sledding. But one night, in March of 1993, something magical happened. An unexpected blast of cold air from Canada and moist air from the Caribbean converged on the eastern part of the United States to create the Storm of the Century. All the Turner kids knew was that when they woke up Saturday morning, there was 17 inches of unbelievable snow on their front lawn and as far as the eye could see. The Turner parents were in shock. Most folks in town were ill-prepared for such a storm. They had no shovels to dig their way out and no salt to keep from slipping. They had no idea what to do. While the adults seemed paralyzed with disbelief, the Turner kids set about having the time of their lives. Lily Mae discovered that a rope tied to a metal trashcan lid made a perfect sled. John Henry figured out that if he put his feet in plastic grocery bags before putting on his rain boots, his feet stayed warm for a longer time. Rachel made snow angels in every part of the yard. Together, all the kids made a huge snowman and dressed it in dad s hat and jacket. (Mr. Turner didn t own a scarf!) For three straight days, the Turner kids had a splendid time. On Tuesday, the temperature hit 70 degrees, and life for these southerners went back to normal.

148 Questions: 1) What does accustomed mean? A. used to B. aware of C. scared of D. interested in 2) Which is the best antonym for infrequent? A. common B. long C. rare D. surprising 3) Which other title would fit this passage best? A B. A Cold March C. Magical Snow D. No Scarf for a Snowman 4) Why might the author have described the storm as magical? A. because Lily Mae believed the snow was magic B. because it was such an unusual thing to happen, it felt like magic C. because there was no other explanation for why the storm occurred D. because the author wanted to cast doubt on whether the storm actually took place 5) How are the children different than the adults in this passage? A. The kids stayed warm, while the adults were very cold. B. The kids knew the storm was coming, while the adults did not. C. The adults still had to go to work, while the kids stayed home. D. The kids went out and had fun, while the adults did not know what to do. 6) What conclusions can be drawn about what the weather is usually like in Birmingham during March? Check all that make sense. A. It is warm. B. It is sunny. C. It is windy. D. It does not snow.

149 Questions (continued): 7) What can be said about the Turner kids' ideas for playing in the snow without the usual snow gear? Check all that make sense. A. They were creative. B. They were complicated. C. They were effective. D. They were misguided. 8) "What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses." "No one knew how to drive in the stuff." Which is the best way to combine the above sentences? A. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses, no one knew how to drive in the stuff. B. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses; no one knew how to drive in the stuff. C. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses: no one knew how to drive in the stuff. D. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancel school and close businesses - no one knew how to drive in the stuff. 9) What was going on outside of Birmingham during this passage? A. The reader does not find out. B. There was no snow anywhere else. C. A storm of historic proportions took place. D. The entire country was dealing with snow. 10) What is the best antonym for splendid? A. great B. perfect C. happy D. terrible

150 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Bullied Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Bryan doesn't like going to school anymore. He is tired of being bullied. Some of the bigger boys at school are mean to him. They push him to the ground. They hide his books. They call him names. They are bullies. When things get really bad, Bryan tells his mom he is sick. You should stay home and rest, Mom says. You'll feel better tomorrow. Then Bryan gets to stay home. He reads books. He watches television. He eats what he wants. He is not scared. You should tell someone you are getting bullied at school, says Bryan s best friend, Link. But Bryan is scared. He doesn't want to tell an adult. That will make things worse, Link, says Bryan. You don t go to my school. You have no idea how mean these guys can be. You can t keep missing school, says Link. Your grades will fall. You will be in trouble at home. And besides, you don't want to be in the seventh grade forever, do you?" Bryan thinks Link is probably right. He will tell his mom about the bullies today when she gets home from work. He will see what happens.

151 Questions: 1) Why doesn't Bryan like going to school anymore? A. The work is hard. B. The kids are mean. C. His best friend does not go there. D. He wants to read books at home. 2) How might Bryan feel when the kids at school are mean to him? Check all that are correct. A. angry B. strong C. smart D. scared 3) Who are the bullies in this story? A. Bryan and Link B. the bigger girls in Bryan's school C. the teachers D. the bigger boys in Bryan's school 4) What grade is Bryan in? A. 5) What do the mean kids do to Bryan? Check all that are correct. A. They call him names. B. They push him to the ground. C. They steal his money. D. They hide his book bag. 6) Why hasn't Bryan's mom helped him? A. She is busy at work. B. She does not care. C. She does not know. D. She does not want to. 7) How might Bryan's mom help when Bryan tells her he is being bullied? A. She might hurt the mean kids. B. She might pack Bryan an extra lunch. C. She might talk to the teachers at the school. D. She might tell Bryan to stay home sick. 8) What does Bryan do when he stays home from school? A. his homework B. plays video games C. gets scared D. reads books

152 Questions (continued): 10) Who tells Bryan that he should tell someone? A. 10) What is likely to happen if Bryan keeps missing school? A. He will get fat. B. His grades will fall. C. Link will stop being his friend. D. The bullies will come to his house. 11) When does Bryan plan to tell his mom about the bullies? A. 12) What kind of friend is Link? Check all that are correct. A. caring B. shy C. helpful D. scared 13) What does it mean to be bullied? A. to not have friends at school B. to have a lot of work C. to have people say and do mean things to you D. to not like school Have you ever been bullied? Do you know someone who has? Explain.

153 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 I live in a house by the water. I sit by the water each day. By the Water Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I take my bag there with me. In it, I pack a book, a blanket, a chair, and a basket of food. I walk down my back steps and sit in the same spot along the grass. When I go out to the water in the morning, I am alone. I hear the water. I see the boats. I feel calm. It is the part of the day I like best. Later, some children come to play by the water. It is afternoon. I hear them laughing. I see them play ball. Nestor, Nestor! the children yell when they see me on the beach. I wave and smile. Play ball with us, Nestor! the children shout. No, thanks, I say. "I am too old to play ball. I walk with a cane and my hands are no longer good at catching." I try to read my book, but it is hard with all the noise. I watch mothers and fathers fish along the shore. I am happy. I hear the water. I see the boats. I eat my lunch. Later, the sky gets dark. I gather all of my things and go back to the house. I get in bed. I hear the water through my open window. The sound puts me to sleep.

154 Questions: 1) Where does Nestor live? A. on a farm B. on a mountain top C. in a boat on the water D. in a house by the water 2) What does Nestor do each day? A. sit by the water B. play by the water C. run by the water D. swim in the water 3) What does Nestor bring with him to the water? Check all that are correct. A. a newspaper B. a blanket C. food D. his fishing pole 4) Who is with Nestor in the morning? A. 5) What do the children do by the water? Check all that are correct. A. boat B. fish C. laugh D. play ball 6) When do children come to the water? A. 7) What kind of person does Nestor seem to be? A. calm B. sad C. loud D. young 8) What does the children's noise make it hard for Nestor to do? A. eat B. catch fish C. read D. sleep

155 Questions (continued): 9) Who fishes? A. 10) Why doesn't Nestor play with the children? Check all that are correct. A. He feels he is too old. B. He cannot catch. C. He is very hungry. D. He is very sleepy. 11) How do Nestor's feelings change during the story? A. from calm to sleepy to happy B. from sleepy to calm to happy C. from calm to happy to sleepy D. from happy to sleepy to calm 12) What does Nestor mean when he says that the sky gets dark? A. that it is night B. that it is raining C. that the wind is blowing D. that the sky is angry 13) What is Nestor's favorite part of the day? A. the morning B. when he is watching the children C. the afternoon D. the night 14) When does Nestor hear the water? A. only in the morning B. only in the afternoon C. only in the night D. all the time 15) What is another way to say It is the part of the day I like best? A. I do not like this part of the day. B. I love this part of the day. C. It is my favorite part of the day. D. I like all parts of the day. What is your favorite part of the day? Why?

156 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Canopy of Nature Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Dad decided last Sunday that we should all go on a camping trip. He read an article in the Sunday paper about camping and how it brings families together under the canopy of nature. Overrated, I joked. What about the canopy of television or the canopy of restaurant food? This will be good for us, Dad said, sliding the magazine across the coffee table. Let s go next week-end. I shot a quick look over at my little brother, Paul. He gave me a slow eyebrow raise which meant, This will probably not go off completely as planned. My smile back said, "But it will surely be fun." I started to think back. Once Dad decided we should all learn how to canoe. We borrowed two canoes from our friends, hoisted them on the van and drove for three hours to a secluded lake in Virginia. Once we got there, we discovered that we had forgotten the paddles. Paul and I got in a canoe with Dad, and our two younger sisters got in a canoe with Mom. We floated aimlessly around the lake for hours. Then we all jumped in with our life jackets on. We pushed the canoes back to shore. It was a fantastic trip. Another time, Dad decided we should all learn how to ski. All of us hate the cold so we spent the week-end huddled by the fire, drinking hot cocoa in the ski lodge and playing board games. It was great. We had a blast. When I stopped daydreaming, Mom was saying, Sweetheart, we don t have a tent. We don t need one! Dad said happily. We ll take all the seats out the van when we get to the campsite and put in an air mattress. I don't know what the punch line will be on this excursion, but I am sure with Mom, Dad and the four of us kids scrunched in a van at some national park, we are bound to have a good time.

157 Questions: 1) Which other title fits this passage best? A. No Paddles B. Never as Planned C. "Hot Cocoa by the Fire" D. "Van Camping for Beginners" 2) What literary term best describes the narrator's daydreams? A. foreshadowing, meaning the use of hints to suggest what is to come B. irony, meaning a contrast between what is stated and what is really meant C. flashback, meaning a scene that interrupts the action to show what happened at an earlier time D. metaphor, meaning the comparison of two unlike things with the intent of giving added meaning to one of them 3) Which of the following could be described as secluded? Check all that are correct. A. a deserted island B. an amusement park C. a hiking trail known only to a few D. a popular beach on the California coast 4) What lesson does the narrator's family seem to live by? A. Camping is an adventure. B. Danger is only in the imagination. C. Things don't need to go as planned to have fun. D. Reading newspapers is a prescription for trouble. 5) Which is the best synonym for excursion? A. evolution B. exodus C. expedition D. hiatus

158 Questions (continued): 6) "Then we all jumped in with our life jackets on. We pushed the canoes back to shore." Which is the best way to combine the above sentences? A. We all jumped in with our life jackets on as we pushed the canoes back to shore. B. Then we all jumped in with our life jackets on, pushing the canoes back to shore. C. We pushed the canoes back to shore while we all jumped in with our life jackets on. D. After we all jumped in with our life jackets on, we pushed the canoes back to shore. 7) Which best describes the narrator's tone? A. condescending B. sarcastic C. jovial D. annoyed 8) Why might the narrator say that the camping trip will have a punch line? A. He feels the trip will be expensive. B. He feels the trip will have difficulties. C. He feels the trip will have a funny ending. D. He feels the sleeping in such close quarters will cause fighting. Do you like to go on excursions? Explain.

159 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 City Girl Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I am a city girl at heart. I ve never milked a cow have no interest. I was shocked when I attended my first pig pickin after my husband and I moved to North Carolina from Boston. I had to avert my eyes from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table. Y all in duh country naw, girl, the host told me happily, apparently thrilled to be the one to indoctrinate me into country living. When, at 8 months pregnant, I volunteered to chaperone my son s strawberry picking field trip, the other mothers looked at me strangely. I thought strawberries grew on tall bushes, not low to the ground. All that squatting sent me into early labor. So, it is with this in mind that you must understand my attitude when I heard a huge hurricane was headed toward Rocky Mount. I thought back to my days growing up in Philadelphia, when snow storms where coming 20 inches -- never to materialize. A long checklist ran in the local newspaper of things townspeople should get to prepare for the hurricane. My neighbor, Wayne, made a point of giving me a copy since he knew I was new to town. I took a cursory glance and thought nothing more of it. While my neighbors were running around taping their windows, getting fresh batteries and prepping their generators, I was, quite literally, sitting in my glass house playing with the kids on the floor. The rains started at 2 o clock in the afternoon. This was, to my amazement, exactly what the weatherman had predicted. These were no ordinary rains, either. From my glass living room, I could no longer see the front lawn or the trees. The rain was as thick as a woolen curtain. My husband s car began floating out of the driveway by nightfall. The water, so insidious, began creeping up our front steps, overturning our potted plants and benches. This is unbelievable! I yelled. I reached for the phone to dial Wayne. He had been born and raised in these parts, and surely, he would know what to do. Wayne, I said worriedly into the receiver. The water is coming up our front steps. It s almost to our door!

160 Ours too, he said, quite calmly, I thought, given the circumstances. What should I do? Put out your sandbags. It will keep the water out as long as it doesn t get too high. Sandbags? You didn t get any? They were on the list, he asked in disbelief. No, I hadn t. Questions: 1) What other title might fit this passage best? A. "Pining for Boston" B. "Learning Hurricanes" C. "Picking Strawberries" D. "Snow Storms that Don't Come" 2) What seems to be the author's purpose in the first four paragraphs of this passage? A. to let the reader know that the narrator went into early labor B. to let the reader know that the narrator does not like pulled pork C. to let the reader know that the narrator is unfamiliar with country life D. to let the reader know that the narrator wants to move back to Boston 3) "I had to avert my eyes from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. I had to open my eyes to the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table. B. I had to direct my eyes towards the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table. C. I had to turn my eyes away from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table. D. I had to cover my eyes from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table.

161 Questions (continued): 4) What does materialize mean? A. to arrive B. to increase in size C. to become actual or real D. to be concerned with consumer goods. 5) Select the best literary term for the following quote: Y all in duh country naw, girl. A. yarn, suggesting an improbable tale B. vice, characterized as an evil habit or wicked tendency C. whimsical, characterized as expressing fanciful or odd notions D. vernacular, meaning the native language of people in a particular geographical area 6) Which best describes the narrator's attitude in this passage? A. forgetful of rural life B. unaware of country ways C. anxious to get back to Boston D. wishful for her children to grow up in the city 7) Which is the best antonym for cursory? A. angry and willful B. fast and intelligent C. slow and deliberate D. slow and superficial 8) What does it mean to literally do something? A. to think about doing something B. to do something exactly as said C. to do something and regret it later D. to do something with a bad attitude 9) What message does the author convey by having the narrator wait out the storm in a glass room? A. It signifies how vulnerable she is. B. It signifies the narrator's nontraditional tastes. C. It lets the reader know that she has not taped up her windows. D. It lets the reader know she can see everything that's going on.

162 Questions (continued): 10) Which best describes the use of woolen curtain in this passage? A. It is used an analogy, meaning the comparison of two things. B. It is used as comic relief, meaning it offers humor in a tense situation. C. It is used as personification, meaning something described as if it were human. D. It is used as satire, meaning it ridicules the weakness of an institution. 11) If the passage were to continue, what might happen next? Check all that are correct. A. Water might get into the house. B. The narrator may flee to safety to Wayne's house. C. The narrator might get in her car and drive to store for sandbags. D. The narrator might ask to borrow some of Wayne's sandbags. 12) Which proverb is most likely learned by the narrator during the hurricane? A. Like will draw like. B. Misfortune tests the sincerity of friends. C. It is best to prepare for the day of necessity. D. It is wise to turn circumstances to good account. 13) How might the narrator have changed her fate? A. She could have taped her windows. B. She could have replaced her old batteries. C. She could have prepped her generator. D. She could have purchased the items from the hurricane list. Which do you like better, the country or the city? Why?

163 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Clean Water Act Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Josiah Hodge collapsed in a seat at the Café du Monde restaurant in New Orleans. He put his head in his hands and let out a deep sigh. Josiah had come to New Orleans as a public service. He had come up with the idea to develop a play for children affected by Hurricane Katrina and had secured a modest grant from the government to do so. But he hadn t accounted for the major hindrance he would face: blistering heat in August with no clean water to drink. Buying water for his crew of 38 volunteers for weeks on end would be far too expensive to do on his shoestring budget, and he had no one to turn to on such short notice for help. Josiah feared he would have to close up the production and return home. As he sipped on a glass of soda, he found it ironic that water, which flooded this city and left many residents without homes or hope, would now be his downfall as he tried to spread the joy of theater to its children. Hello, sir, a man at the table next to him said. What brings you to New Orleans? Josiah shook his head. Later, he would find it amusing that this man knew, just by looking, that Josiah was not a local. For now, he was just tired and irritated. Look, I don t mean to be rude, but I ve had a bad day, Josiah said. I don t much feel like talking. What brings you to town? the man said, pleasantly. Josiah grudgingly talked a bit about his work as a theater director in Manhattan and his dream to bring a top flight play to the children of New Orleans. The next day, as Josiah left a blazing hot outdoor studio, he noticed the same man from the restaurant, parked on the street. A shock of fluffy white hair framed his dark face, making him look almost saintly. Look sir, what do you want? To help. How? What do you need?

164 What I really need is clean water. That s all I need. Josiah turned and walked away. He had been rude, he knew, but he was so frustrated by this problem. When he arrived back at his hotel room that evening, the front desk clerk handed Josiah an unmarked envelope. Inside was a check for $2,000. The memo line read, For water. Josiah was flabbergasted. Who was this man? As he pondered his good fortune, the phone rang in his hotel room. Will that get you some water? a voice said on the other end. Why, yes, yes it will, Josiah said. Thank you so much for your generosity. My wife and I would like to take you to dinner. Josiah could not refuse! This man was his savior, and his curiosity had gotten the best of him. Who was this benefactor? At dinner, Etienne Fanchon and his wife, Adelaide, formally introduced themselves. Mr. Fanchon never graduated from high school, but inherited 5 acres of land from his father upon his death. For years, Mr. Fanchon grew cucumbers on the land, barely making a living. One day, a neighbor offered Fanchon a bag of money if Mr. Fanchon would let him bury three old trucks at the back of his property. Mr. Fanchon took the bag and agreed. Later, he could not believe how much money was in the bag. And just for letting him bury some trucks! The next morning, Mr. Fanchon said, he woke up, picked all the cucumbers off his land and converted the 5 acres into a waste management facility. He is now one of New Orleans few multimillionaires. So, I have all this money now and live to help others, said Mr. Fanchon. That is why I ve helped you. Questions: 1) Which best describes Josiah's mood at the beginning of this passage? A. tired and vindictive B. angry and conniving C. pensive and high strung D. frustrated and overwhelmed 2) How does Josiah's mood change when he gets the check? A. He is thankful and curious. B. He is confused and questioning. C. He is excited and unstable. D. He is suspicious and cautious.

165 Questions (continued): 3) Which best serves as the climax of this story? A. when Josiah opens the envelope B. when Mr. Fanchon shows up at the studio C. when Mr. Fanchon describes how he got so rich D. when Josiah accepts Mr. Fanchon's invitation to dinner 4) Mr. Fanchon is described in the passage as saintly, and as being the narrator's savior. What can you infer from this description? Check all that are correct. A. that he has many secrets B. that he has helped the narrator immensely C. that he helps everyone he comes in contact with D. that for the narrator, there is something divine about Mr. Fanchon 5) Which is the best antonym for hindrance? A. assistance B. obstacle C. profit D. strength 6) Using the passage as a guide, what does it mean to do something on a shoestring budget? A. to do something with little help B. to do something with little luck C. to do something with little money D. to do something with little patience 7) Which is the best antonym for irritated? A. acclimated B. bashful C. melancholy D. mollified 8) What lesson does Josiah learn in this passage? A. It is okay to be somewhat rude on first meeting. B. Help can come from the most unlikely of places. C. Frustration can often cloud one's judgment. D. Theater programs are an excellent way to help those in need.

166 Questions (continued): 9) Why does Josiah grudgingly talk to Mr. Fanchon in the Cafe du Monde? A. He is hungry. B. He is irritated and does not feel like being bothered. C. He decided conversation might make him feel better. D. He wanted to spread the word about his theater program. 10) In this passage, how are Josiah and Mr. Fanchon alike? A. Both are patient. B. Both lack ambition. C. Both are quick to show emotion. D. Both have philanthropic interests. What does it mean to be altruistic? Are you an altruist? Explain.

167 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Dreams Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The relationship between my mother, sister and me had been cold and inimical for as long as I could remember. To me, my mother was irrational, often hurling hurtful invectives for the slightest infraction. My sister, five years my senior, seemed not to have a brain in her head. Tammy dithered about everything, incapable of making any firm decision. No matter how often my mother deprecated her -- dumb, ugly, fat Tammy made futile attempts to fawn her way back into mother s good graces. My father would pontificate, You three are more alike then you know. In April of 2000, my mother kicked us both out of the house. (Dad had been exiled many years before.) My sister and I went our separate ways. It was then that I began having recurring dreams. In one, I am running to catch up with a woman. Each time I get near, I trip and fall. Another woman comes with great alacrity and offers her hand, but when I reach to grab it, she disappears. In another, a female professor hands me a test. Although I have spent hours studying for it, I know none of the answers. The professor derides me for my poor performance. These dreams were not hard to understand. In fact they were pellucid, and absent any knowledge of dream interpretation, I was still able to devise their significance. I knew that they both reflected the pugnacious relationship I shared with my mother and sister. However, there was one dream I could never quite construe. I bite into an apple. All of my teeth fall out. I had this dream far more than any of the others. Years later, in an effort to heal our fractious relationship, Mom, Tammy and I would elect to go to counseling together. After several sessions, I tell my dream about teeth tumbling out of my head. My God, said my mother. I ve had the exact same dream many times. Me too, said Tammy solemnly. Breakthrough? No idea. But I was reminded of the words of my now-dead father. Perhaps the three of us are more alike than we know.

168 E. Questions: 1) Which is most likely to make a relationship inimical? A. great pathos B. frequent maledictions C. magnanimous gestures D. ingenuous discussions 2) Which is the best synonym for invectives? A. icons B. decisions C. paragons D. accusations 3) If this passage were true, which would best describe it? A. a literary essay, based on a piece of literature B. a memoir essay, centered on a significant memory from the past C. a persuasive essay, characterized by choosing a side and refuting other arguments D. an expository essay, meant to acquaint the reader with a body of knowledge 4) What event does the father's comment foreshadow? A. Mother is irrational. B. Tammy is fawning. C. The sisters are both kicked out of the house. D. The narrator, mother and Tammy all have the same dream. 5) What is the tone of this passage? A. matter-of-fact B. mawkish C. maudlin D. mercurial 6) How does the relationship between the narrator, her mother and sister seem to change from the beginning of passage to end? A. from brusque to florid B. from egregious to impassive C. from enervating to rejuvenating D. from destructive to collaborative

169 F. Questions (continued): 7) Which is the best antonym for pellucid? A. conspicuous B. disquieting C. enlightening D. incomprehensible 8) "I bite into an apple. All of my teeth fall out." Choose the best way to combine the above sentences. A. I bite into an apple, all of my teeth fall out. B. As all my teeth fall out, I bite into an apple. C. I bite into an apple, and all of my teeth fall out. D. While I bite into I bite into an apple, all my teeth fell out. 9) "The professor derides me for my poor performance." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. The professor is in disbelief due to my poor performance. B. The professor laughs mockingly at my poor performance. C. The professor gives me a failing grade for my poor performance. D. The professor gives me a tutorial because of my poor performance. 10) Which words have a negative connotation? Check all that are correct. A. alacrity B. deprecated C. dithered D. pugnacious

170 Questions (continued): 11) If the professor in the narrator's dream represented someone in her life, who might that person be, and why? A. the sister, because she was described in the passage as dithering B. the mother, because she was described in the passage as mean-spirited C. the narrator, because she seems to be testing everyone in the passage D. the father, because he understood that that the three women were alike 12) Which is the best way to make these fragments grammatically correct? Breakthrough? No idea. A. Breakthrough, no idea. B. Was this a breakthrough? I have no idea. C. If this was a breakthrough I have no idea. D. I had no idea. This was a breakthrough. What kind of dreams do you have? What do they mean anything? Explain.

171 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 First Prize Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. My name is Tess and I ride horses. I ride them in the circus. I ride them in parades. I ride them in shows. I am riding in a horse show today. My horse runs. My horse jumps. My horse dances. I hold on! My horse is the best. I named her Twin. I feel like the horse and I are the same when I ride her. My mother is not at the horse show. She has to work. My father is there. He claps. He yells. He smiles. The show ends. A man announces the winners. "First prize goes to Tess and Twin!" he says. He gives me a blue ribbon. I am very excited. My dad gives me a hug. "You won!" he says. My dad and I go home. My dad tells my mom about my ribbon. She cries. She gives me a big hug. Your hard work is showing, she says.

172 Questions: 1) Where does Tess ride her horse? Check all that are correct. A. in the circus B. at school C. in parades D. in the woods 2) What prize does Tess win in the horse show? A. 3) What does Tess need to do while her horse runs and jumps? A. dance B. hold on C. sing D. stand up 4) Where is Tess's mother during the show? A. 5) Why does Tess's father yell? A. He is mad. B. He needs help. C. He is surprised. D. He is excited. 6) Why do you think Tess named the horse Twin? A. because Tess has a twin B. because there are two horses C. because another horse looks very similar to Twin D. because Tess feels the same as Twin when they ride 7) What color ribbon does Tess get? A. 8) How does Tess's mom feel about the ribbon? Check all that are correct. A. happy B. mad C. proud D. sad

173 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Flower Power Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. When her grandmother s health began to deteriorate in the fall of 1994, Mary would make the drive from Washington, DC to Winchester, Va., every few days. She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and monotonous. She preferred to take meandering back roads to her grandmother s hospital. When she drove through the rocky town of Harpers Ferry, the beauty of the rough waters churning at the intersection of the Shenandoah and Potomac rivers always captivated her. Toward the end of her journey, Mary actually did have to get on highway 81. It was here that she discovered a surprising bit of beauty during one of her trips. Along the median of the highway, there were a long stretch of wildflowers. They were thin and delicate and purple, almost poetic in appearance. The first time she saw the flowers, Mary was seized by an uncontrollable urge to pull over on the highway and yank a bunch from the soil. She carried them into her grandmother s room when she arrived at the hospital and placed them in a water pitcher by her bed. For a moment her grandmother seemed more lucid than usual. She thanked Mary for the flowers, commented on their beauty and asked where she had gotten them. Mary was overjoyed by the flowers seeming ability to wake something up inside her ailing grandmother. Afterwards, Mary began carrying scissors in the car during her trips to visit grandma. She would quickly glide onto the shoulder, jump out the car, and clip a bunch of flowers. Each time Mary placed the flowers in the pitcher, her grandmother s eyes would light up and they would have a splendid conversation. One morning in late October, Mary got a call that her grandmother had taken a turn for the worse. Mary was in such a hurry to get to her grandmother that she sped past her flower spot. She decided to turn around, head several miles back, and cut a bunch. Mary arrived at the hospital to find her grandmother very weak and unresponsive. She placed the flowers in the pitcher and sat down to hold her grandmother s hand. She felt a squeeze on her fingers. It was the last conversation they had.

174 Questions: 1) Which is the best antonym for deteriorate? A. improve B. increase C. adjust D. accumulate 2) "She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and monotonous." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and tedious. B. She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and confusing. C. She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and nervewracking. D. She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and time consuming. 3) What is the best meaning of the word captivated? A. energized B. fascinated C. humbled D. relaxed 4) "They were thin and delicate and purple, almost poetic in appearance." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. vernacular, suggesting a particular geographical area B. alliteration, characterized by the repetition of a letter or sound C. foreshadowing, characterized by the use of hints to suggest what is to come D. personification, characterized by a thing being described as if it were human 5) Which best describes what stopping for flowers on the side of the highway became for Mary? A. monotonous B. a ritual C. a regret D. torturous 6) What other title would best fit this passage? A. The Fall B. "On the Road" C. Wildflower Poetry D. "Living for Tomorrow"

175 Questions (continued): 7) Why might the author have described the flowers as poetic? A. The author wanted to depict this passage as a poem. B. The author wanted to convey that this type of flower had been written about by poets. C. The author wanted to contrast the flowers with other flowers considered less beautiful. D. The author wanted to convey that Mary felt the flowers were as beautiful as verses on a page. 8) Using the passage as a guide, what kind of person does Mary seem to be? Check all that are correct. A. She is impatient. B. She is not the safest driver. C. She is drawn to the beauty in nature. D. She has a deep love for her grandmother. 9) Which is the best antonym for lucid? A. false B. realistic C. obscure D. determined 10) What do the flowers seem to come to signify for Mary? A. how beautiful the highways can be B. an opportunity to pull off on the side of the road C. a chance to converse with her grandmother D. a chance make the hospital room smell better Do you have many routines? Do you like routines? Explain.

176 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Fried Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. My cell phone rings again. It is futile to ignore it anymore. Valerie is persistent. She will continue to bedevil me until I acquiesce. Hello, I answer. State Fair, Bobbie? she says in her singsong voice. When are we heading out? Only two more days left! I abhor the State Fair. The boisterous crowds, the insanely long lines and the impossibility of finding a clean restroom all combine to make this an event that I dread. For Valerie, my best friend since the angst of middle school, the State Fair is a sign that divine powers really do exist. Really, Bobbie, where else can you pet a cow, ride a horse, fall ten stories, see the world s smallest person and eat fried macaroni and cheese? Valerie asks gleefully. Hell? I guess. The fried food at the State Fair is a gastronomical nightmare on its own. I once tried a fried pickle at the fair and was sick to my stomach for hours. And a fried donut hamburger with bacon, cheese AND a greasy egg? How could that not be deleterious to your health? I have not seen Valerie for a good month; our schedules are both so hectic. My hatred of the State Fair becomes inconsequential to my desire to hang with Val. Alas, I ignore my anti-fair bias for the umpteenth year. Pick me up at noon, I say and hang up the phone.

177 Questions: 1) Choose the best synonym for futile. A. arduous B. enervating C. homicidal D. ineffective 2) What does it mean to acquiesce? A. to give in B. to speak kindly C. to pay attention D. to answer the phone 3) " I truly abhor the State Fair." Choose the most accurate rewrite of the above sentence. A. I really hate the State Fair. B. I am sickened by the State Fair. C. I have no time for the State Fair. D. I am uncertain about the State Fair. 4) How does Valerie seem to feel about the State Fair? A. ambivalent B. condescending C. jubilant D. nonchalant 5) What does the word gastronomical suggest? A. relating to health risks B. relating to worldliness C. relating to culinary issues D. relating to higher education 6) " And a fried donut hamburger with bacon, cheese AND a greasy egg?" What is wrong with the above sentence? Check all that are correct. A. There is no verb. B. There is no subject. C. It is a sentence fragment. D. There are too many descriptions.

178 Questions (continued): 7) Why might the author have chosen to capitalize all the letters in the word "and" when writing about the donut hamburger? A. to make sure the reader understood it was a list B. to show that a greasy egg was the last ingredient C. to highlight that the sentence was written incorrectly D. to emphasize just how many ingredients were on the hamburger 8) Choose the best antonym for deleterious. A. amicable B. beneficial C. fortuitous D. pathetic 9) How is hang used in this passage? A. as a hyperbole, meaning as an exaggeration B. as a slang expression, meaning informal language C. as an analogy, meaning a comparison between two things D. as a denotation, meaning the literal meaning of a word 10) What does the author's use of the word umpteenth suggest? A. that the fair has been around for a long time B. that this is the last time Bobbie will agree to go to the fair C. that Bobbie goes to the State Fair with Val frequently D. that this is the first time Bobbie has agreed to go with Val Would you like to attend the State Fair as described in the story? Explain.

179 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Gas Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Machines need gas to work. Cars need gas. Buses need gas. Airplanes need gas. People use a lot of gas. It makes our machines work. Questions: 1) What needs gas to work? A. animals B. machines C. plants 2) Which thing needs gas to work? A. a dog B. a truck C. a bicycle 3) People use a lot of gas. This means... A. People don't use gas. B. People use a little gas. C. People use much gas. Is gas good? Is it bad? Explain.

180 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Green Grass Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Plants need sunlight and water to make their own food. You can do an experiment to test if this is true. Place a bucket over a patch of green grass. After a few days, lift the bucket. You will see that the grass is not as green anymore. If you leave the bucket in place for a week, the grass will become very dull. This happens because it cannot make food in the dark. Remove the bucket. In a few days, the grass will start turning green again. Questions: 1) What is the main point of this passage? A. that buckets are bad B. that plants need sunlight C. that grass is not pretty when it is dull 3) What happens after a few days? A. The grass turns brown. B. The grass gets very dull C. The grass is not as green 2) What is an experiment? A. a way to grow grass B. a way to test an idea C. a way to use a bucket 4) Which is the best antonym for dull? A. bright B. brown C. colorful 5) According to the passage, how long does it take for the grass to become dull? A. a month B. a week C. a few days 6) What might happen if the bucket stays on the grass for a very long time? A. The grass might die. B. Flowers might start to bloom. C. The grass might start growing again.

181 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Griffin plays the violin. Griffin s Talents Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. He takes lessons after school on Tuesdays. Griffin s violin teacher is Mr. Thomas. Mr. Thomas tells Griffin to practice every day. Griffin practices his violin on most days. On the days Griffin does not practice his violin, he plays soccer with his friends or fixes old clocks for fun. You are a boy of many talents, Griffin s parents tell him. That means you are good at doing many things. Griffin likes when his parents say this to him. He loves playing the violin. He loves playing soccer. He loves fixing clocks. Griffin loves to do many things, but he does not have the time to do them all every day. Questions: 1) What does Griffin play? Check all that are correct. A. board games B. the piano C. soccer D. the violin 2) When does Griffin take violin lessons? A. on Tuesdays after soccer B. on Thursdays after soccer C. on Tuesdays after school D. on Thursdays after school 3) When does Mr. Thomas tell Griffin to practice? A. every day B. most days C. only on Tuesdays D. when he wants to 4) When does Griffin practice the violin? A. every day B. most days C. never D. only on Tuesdays

182 Questions (continued): 5) How does Griffin feel about the violin? A. He loves it. B. He thinks it is hard. C. He hates to practice. D. He does not like the sound. 6) What things does Griffin love to do? Check all that are correct. A. read books B. fix old clocks C. build birdhouses D. play soccer with his friends 7) What does Mr. Thomas teach Griffin? A. to play soccer B. to fix old clocks C. to play the violin D. to build birdhouses 8) What does it mean to have many talents? A. to want to do a lot B. to be good at playing the violin C. to be busy doing many things D. to be good at doing a lot of things 9) How come Griffin does not play the violin every day? A. He does not like the violin. B. He wants to play the piano. C. He is busy doing other things. D. His mom says not to play every day. Do you have a talent? What is it? Would you like to have a talent?

183 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 I fly airplanes for work. I am a pilot. I Fly Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Sometimes, I take my little girl with me. Her name is Bristol. Bristol likes to look out the window of the airplane. She likes to look at the clouds. She thinks the clouds look like animals. She points at one with her finger. "I see a giraffe!" she says. I also have a little boy. My little boy does not like to be up high. He does not come with me on the airplane. He likes to play airplane with me. We play airplane when I get home. We run around the yard. We wave our arms in the air. We make airplane noises. Questions: 1) Who is telling this story? A. Bristol. B. A little boy. C. A pilot. D. A friend. 2) What does Bristol like to do in the airplane? A. Look out the window. B. Run in the yard. C. Sit in the back. D. Be the pilot. 3) Bristol points at something outside the window. What does she point at? A. A giraffe. B. Her dad. C. A cloud. D. A tree. 4) Why doesn't the little boy like to fly? A.

184 englishforeveryone.org Bears Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. American Black Bears live in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. An American Black Bear can be up to seven feet tall if it stands on its hind legs. A mother Black Bear can have 2-4 baby bears. They have the bears in winter. The baby bears are called cubs. During the winter, the cubs stay with their mother in the bear den. During the summer, the cubs like to go outside. They like to run and play. The cubs drink milk provided by their mother. The cubs eat nuts, berries, and insects. The cubs also love to eat honey. During the winter, the cubs sleep in the den with their mothers. They rest all winter. The cubs will leave their mother the next summer. They will move away to start their own family. Brown Bears live in the North. They live in Wyoming, Montana, Idaho, Washington, Alaska, Canada, and northern Eurasia. Brown Bears are very big. A Brown Bear can be up to ten feet tall if it stands on its hind legs. Like Black Bear cubs, Brown Bear cubs are born in winter. They drink milk until spring or summer. The mothers have 2-4 cubs. Brown Bear cubs stay with their mothers for 2-4 years. The adult females, called sows, teach them to hunt. They like to hunt at night. They like to hunt in large, open spaces. Brown Bears eat mostly fruits and vegetables, but they also hunt and eat other animals. Questions: 1) When are bear cubs born? A. Winter B. Spring C. Summer D. Fall 2) What do bears do all winter? A. They learn to hunt. B. They run and play. C. They fish. D. They rest. 3) How tall can a Brown Bear get? A. Under 7 feet B. Up to 8 feet C. Under 9 feet D. Up to 10 feet 4) Brown Bears leave their mothers A. when they are 1-2 years old. B. when they are 2-4 years old. C. when they are 3-5 years old. D. when they are 4-5 years old. 5) Where do black bears like to hunt? A. In open spaces B. In the woods C. In open spaces and in the woods D. In open spaces and near the water Vocabulary: 1) Bear cubs are A. mother bears. B. baby bears. C. where bears rest. D. groups of bears. 2) What is the best synonym for during? A. after B. before C. while D. what 3) Outside is A. a place where bears hunt. B. a place that is in the woods. C. a place that is not enclosed by walls. D. a place that does not receive sunlight. 4) When you leave, you D. go home E. go to sleep F. go away D. go back 5) What are open spaces? A Big places with many trees B. Big grassy areas C. Small places with tall trees D. Small grassy areas

185 englishforeveryone.org Beds Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. A long time ago, people didn t sleep in beds. Ten thousand years ago, people probably slept on leaves and animal furs. Long ago in Egypt, people ate, slept, and talked to friends in bed. Over 3,000 years ago, King Tut of Egypt had a beautiful bed made of wood and gold! But common people in Egypt slept on beds of grass and leaves. In the 16 th century, in the 1500 s, people piled bird feathers or straw on rope webs. Later, people made mattresses by stuffing feathers inside large cotton bags. Louis 14 th, king of France from 1643 until 1715, had 413 beds. He liked to talk to his friends and do his work in bed. He liked beautiful beds. In 1865, people started to put springs under their mattress to make it more flexible. This would make it bend and flex when the sleeper moved. By the 1930 s, most beds had springs. About 100 years after people started to put springs under their mattress, the modern waterbed was invented. Today there are different kinds of beds. Some people have waterbeds. Some sleep on mats. Others sleep on foam mattresses or airbeds. Questions: 1) King Tut and Louis 14 th both had A. springs in their beds. B. beds made of fur. C. beautiful beds. D. many beds. 2) How many beds did Louis 14 th have? A. 3,000 B. 1,715 C. 1,643 D ) Who liked to talk in bed? A. Egyptian people B. French people C. The king of France D. Both A and C are correct. 4) The modern waterbed was invented in A. the 1830 s. B. the 1860 s. C. the 1930 s. D. the 1960 s. 5) What do people sleep on now? A. Foam mattresses B. Waterbeds C. Airbeds D. All of the above Vocabulary: 1) The best synonym for common is A. rich. B. sleepy. C. ordinary. D. important. 2) A century is A. 1 year. B. 10 years. C. 100 years. D years. 3) Mattresses are A. mats filled with something soft. B. wooden frames for beds. C. types of rope. D. kings. 4) Something flexible A. sleeps very easily. B. sleeps a lot. C. bends and flexes. D. looks beautiful. 5) When something is invented it is A. made of something soft. B. built of wood and gold. C. made for the first time. D. built with springs.

186 englishforeveryone.org Bees Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. Bees are insects. Bees are special insects because they can fly! They can move through the air like an airplane! Bees can fly because they have wings. They use their wings to fly. Bees can fly fast. Bees can also fly slow. They can fly up and they can fly down. They need to fly to get to the flowers! Bees can have three colors. They can be yellow, red, and orange. All bees are black in some places. Bees have three main parts. They have a head. They have a body. And, they have a stinger. The stinger is used to defend against enemies. They also have six legs. They use their legs to stand and climb. They also use their legs to eat and collect pollen. Bees live in many places. They live in Africa, Australia, Asia, Europe, North America, South America. The only continent that bees do not live on is Antarctica! I understand why they don t live in Antarctica. It s too cold! Most of the time, bees are nice to humans. If you do not bother them, they will not bother you. Have fun watching the bees this summer! Questions: Vocabulary: 1) What are bees? A. Mammals B. Birds C. Reptiles D. Insects 2) How do bees fly? A. They use their legs. B. They use their head. C. They use their wings. D. None of the above. 3) How many legs do bees have? A. Two B. Four C. Six D. Eight 4) What is the stinger used for? A. To eat food. B. To defend against enemies. C. Both A and B. D. None of the above. 5) Where do bees live? A. North America B. Asia C. Antarctica D. Both A and B 1) Bees are special. This means A. bees are normal. B. bees are regular. C. bees are unusual. D. bees are average. 2) Bees can fly. This means A. bees can move through the air. B. bees can dig in the ground. C. bees can see very far. D. bees can swim through the water. 3) What is the opposite of defend? A. Run B. Hide C. Protect D. Attack 4) What is a continent? A. A large piece of connected land. B. A large river. C. A small part of the ocean. D. A swamp. 5) If you bother something, you A. make it angry. B. make it get upset. C. make it mad. D. All of the above.

187 englishforeveryone.org Dogs Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. There are wild dogs and pet dogs. Pet dogs are helpers and friends to people. There were no pet dogs 15,000 years ago. Men and women learned how to work with dogs. Dogs helped humans travel from Asia to North America 10,000 years ago by pulling sleds in the snow. People say dogs are man s best friend. They help with farming. They help with hunting. They help with fishing. They can pull things for people. They can help find things. There are many colors of dogs. There are white dogs, gray dogs, black dogs, and brown dogs. A dog s fur can be short or long. Dogs have curly hair or straight fur. There are very small dogs. They are only 6-8 inches tall. There are very big dogs. They are about 3 feet tall. Some dogs can see well. Some dogs do not see very well. All dogs can hear well. They can hear sounds that people cannot hear. They can hear high sounds and low sounds. They can hear sound very far away. All dogs can smell very well. They can smell 40 times better than humans! Dogs live 5 to 13 years, but some dogs live much longer. One dog lived to be 24 years old! Questions: 1) Dogs helped people go to America by A. pulling sleds in the snow. B. helping with farming. C. helping find things. D. None of the above 2) How tall are the smallest dogs? A. 3 inches B. 5 inches C. 6 inches D. 13 inches. 3) How tall are the biggest dogs? A. 1 foot B. 2 feet C. 3 feet D. 5 feet 4) What can all dogs do well? A. see B. hear C. smell D. Both B and C are correct 5) How old was the oldest dog? A. 5 years old B. 10 years old C. 13 years old D. 24 years old Vocabulary: 1) The best antonym for pet is A. wild animal. B. domestic animal. C. large animal. D. friendly animal. 2) The opposite of pull is A. receive. B. carry. C. push. D. help. 3) A dog s fur is the dog s A. nose B. eyes C. hair D. ears 4) Straight hair is A. curly. B. long. C. brown. D. not curly. 5) Another word for human is A. dog. B. animal. C. sound. D. person.

188 englishforeveryone.org Fish Reading Comprehension Informational Passages (4) Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. There are many kinds of fish. There are big fish, small fish, long fish, and short fish. People know about 25,000 different kinds of fish. There are probably 15,000 kinds of fish that people do not know about. There are many colors of fish. There are red fish, blue fish, yellow fish, and white fish. Fish do not all eat the same things. Some fish eat flies or other bugs. Some eat plants like seaweed. Some eat worms. Some fish eat other fish. The fastest fish can swim almost 70 miles per hour. That s fast! The heaviest fish weighs 15 tons. That s very heavy! The longest fish are sharks. Sharks can be 50 feet long. That s very long! The smallest fish is less than 1/3 inch long. That s very small! Fish can see, feel, and taste. Some fish can smell. Some can hear sounds in the water. Fish can feel pain. When they get hurt, it feels bad. Questions: 1) How many kinds of fish do people know about? A. 10,000 B. 15,000 C. 25,000 D. 40,000 2) There are many A. kinds of fish B. sizes of fish C. colors of fish D. All of the above 3) How fast can the fastest fish swim? A. 10 miles per hour B. 20 miles per hour C. 40 miles per hour D. 70 miles per hour 4) How long can sharks be? A. 40 feet B. 50 feet C. 60 feet D. 70 feet 5) How much does the heaviest fish weigh? A. 15 pounds B. 150 pounds C. 15 tons D. 150 tons Vocabulary: 1) A word that means the same thing as the word kind is A. type. B. color. C. name. D. number. 2) An example of a color is A. big. B. red. C. long. D. kind. 3) Flies are A. fish. B. bugs. C. plants. D. worms. 4) Weight is a measure of how A. tall something is. B. heavy something is. C. fast something is. D. smart something is. 5) Pain is A. a bad feeling. B. a big fish. C. a sound. D. a taste.

189 englishforeveryone.org Flags Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. The first flags were probably in China. People flew flags in China over 4,000 years ago. Each part of the army had its own flag so the soldiers could see their leaders. Early flags were sticks of wood. They had pictures cut into the wood. Iran had metal flags about 3,000 years ago. Old Greek coins show pictures of flags. People in Rome also used flags over 2,000 years ago. People first made flags of cloth about 2,000 years ago. Those flags looked like today s flags. Flags are important at sea. Most ships fly their own country s flag and the flag of the country they are visiting. When a ship flies only its own flag, it is ready to fight. Every country now has a flag. Every U.S. state has a flag. Clubs, teams, and schools have flags. The Olympics has a flag. The Olympics flag has five rings of five colors. Each ring stands for, or represents, a continent. It means that people from five continents Africa, Asia, Europe, North America, and South America come to play. Railway lines also use flags. Railway flags tell the trains what to do. For example, a red flag tells the train to stop, just like a stop sign. A blue, white, or green flag tells the train that it can go. A blue flag on the side of a train means someone is working on the train. It means nobody can move the train. Questions: 1) The first flags were made of Vocabulary: 1) Another word for cloth is A. wood B. cloth C. rings D. metal 2) How many flags do most ships fly? A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 3 3) The Olympics flag has A. five rings B. five colors C. five countries D. Both A and B are correct. 4) A white flag tells a train that A. it can go. B. it should stop. C. it has to be careful. D. nobody can move the train. 5) People flew the first flags A. less than 2,000 years ago. B. about 2,000 years ago. C. about 3,000 years ago D. more than 4,000 years ago. A. color. B. fabric. C. metal. D. wood. 2) Ships are A. boats. B. coins. C. flags. D. teams. 3) Another way to say represents is A. flies. B. visits. C. works on. D. stands for. 4) Continents are A. countries. B. kinds of games. C. large pieces of land. D. pictures cut in wood. 5) If you tell someone information you A. receive information from them. B. want information from them. C. take information from them. D. give information to them.

190 englishforeveryone.org Frogs Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. Frogs live on land and in water. Frogs have long back legs and short bodies. Their eyes stick out. They do not have tails. Most of the time they move in the water, but they can also move on land. Frogs have smooth, not bumpy, skin. They can breathe through their skin. Their skin must stay wet so they can breathe through it. Young frogs must breathe through their skin. Older frogs grow lungs. They breathe through their lungs when they are on land, just like people do. Frogs lay their eggs in ponds and other bodies of water, like lakes. Frogs must move fast to catch something to eat. They must also get away from bigger animals. Some frogs have webs of skin between their toes. Webbed toes are good because it helps them to swim very fast. Tree frogs have toe pads. The toe pads help them hang on when they climb. When they climb, they move up trees or rocks. Some tree frogs live high in very tall trees. Those tree frogs have webs between their toes. They can jump from tree to tree. They can t fly, but they can stay in the air for a long jump. Questions: 1) A young frog s skin must stay wet so A. the frog can swim. B. the frog can climb C. the frog can lay eggs. D. the frog can breathe. 2) Where do frogs lay their eggs? A. In water B. On land C. In trees D. Under rocks 3) How are young and old frogs different? A. Only older frogs have lungs. B. Only young frogs can swim. C. Only young frogs can live in water. D. Only older frogs must have wet skin. 4) Some frogs have toe pads to help them... A. climb. B. swim. C. jump. D. fly. 5) What helps frogs swim and jump? A. Toe pads B. Their lungs C. Their smooth skin D. Webs of skin between their toes Vocabulary: 1) Smooth skin is A. not bumpy. B. not wet. C. bumpy. D. wet. 2) People and frogs both use lungs to A. climb. B. move fast. C. breathe. D. get something to eat. 3) Ponds are A. small frogs. B. frog eggs. C. large animals D. bodies of water. 4) To hang on means to A. fall down. B. hold on. C. go on. D. None of the above. 5) To climb means to A. move fast. B. take in. C. move up. D. move in.

191 englishforeveryone.org Houses Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. There are houses all over the world. Some houses are large. Some are small. Some are made of wood. Some are made of rock. Some are made of mud. Some are made of cloth. In cold places, some houses are made of ice frozen water! People usually build their houses with something that is easy to find. For example, there are many trees in a forest. So people who live there might build a house made of logs. Some houses have one room. Some houses have many rooms. There is usually a bedroom for sleeping. There is often a kitchen for cooking. There is usually a bathroom. There is often a living room for sitting and talking. Some houses have basements. The basement is under the main part of the house. Some houses have attics. The attic is above the main part of the house. Most houses have a door so people can enter and exit the house. Most houses have windows so the people can look outside. Windows also let air into the house from outdoors. Some houses are fancy. They are painted bright colors, and are very decorative. Some houses not fancy they are plain and simple. Houses look very different in different parts of the world. But, people who live in a house probably all agree that there is no place like home! Questions: 1) Why are many forest houses made of logs? A. There are many logs in the forest. B. Trees are easy to find in the forest. C. There is a lot of wood in the forest. D. All of the above 2) Why do houses have bedrooms? A. For sleeping B. For cooking C. For relaxing D. For building things 3) Where is the basement of a house? A. Beside the house B. Above the house C. Under the house D. None of the above 4) Houses have doors A. so people can enter and exit. B. so people can sleep. C. so people can cook and eat. D. Both A and B are correct. 5) Houses have windows to A. let people go outside. B. let people look outside. C. let air into the house from outdoors. D. Both B and C are correct. Vocabulary: 1) What is ice? A. Trees that are cut down B. Water that is frozen C. A kind of grass D. A kind of cloth 2) A kitchen is a A. room for sleeping. B. room for cooking. C. room which is under a house. D. room which is above a house. 3) An attic is A. a house made of ice. B. a house in the forest. C. a room under a house. D. a room above a house. 4) If something is fancy, it is A. bright and decorative. B. plain and simple. C. ugly. D. old and tarnished. 5) If people agree, they A. decide to do something. B. feel the same way about something. C. live in the same house. D. do something together.

192 englishforeveryone.org Humans Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. The human body has many parts. People have two arms and two legs. We have two hands and two feet. We have five fingers on each hand. We have five toes on each foot. We each have two eyes on our face. We see with our eyes. We each have two ears. We hear with our ears. We each have one nose on our face. We smell with our nose. We each have one tongue. We taste with our tongue. We each have one brain. We think with our brain. We each have two lungs in our chest. We breathe with our lungs. Humans can do many things. People can walk. We use our legs and feet to walk. We can run. Running is faster than walking. We use our legs and feet to run. We can climb. We use our arms, hands, legs and feet to climb. We can climb up trees or climb up ladders. We can eat and drink. We use our mouth and teeth to eat. We eat meat, fruit, vegetables, and other foods. We can drink lots of things, but we drink water the most. We also use our mouth and teeth to talk. Questions: 1) Each human has five A. feet on each leg. B. toes on each foot. C. hands on each arm. D. Both A and B are correct. 2) How many ears does each human have? A. 1 B. 2 C. 5 D. 10 3) What do we smell with? A. Our toes B. Our nose C. Our lungs D. Our fingers 4) We use our legs to A. run. B. walk. C. climb. D. All of the above 5) What do humans eat? A. Meat B. Water C. Ladders D. Coffee Vocabulary: 1) Fingers are part of your A. leg B. foot C. nose D. hand 2) Your face has your A. eyes, nose and mouth. B. arms, legs and feet. C. fingers and toes. D. feet and toes. 3) Your tongue is part of your A. ear. B. nose. C. chest. D. mouth. 4) You use your lungs to A. eat. B. hear. C. smell. D. breathe. 5) To climb is to A. go in. B. go up. C. taste food. D. drink water.

193 englishforeveryone.org Ice Fishing Reading Comprehension Informational Passages (4) Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. The first tip for a good day of ice fishing is to wear the right clothes. You should dress in layers. Wear 2 or 3 shirts, so you can take off a layer when you are warm. Wear a face mask, a warm hat with ear flaps over your ears, and warm gloves and boots. The second tip is to stay warm. Some people put up cloth tents when they go ice fishing. Some people own small ice houses where they can stay warm. You can use a small heater inside the tent or outside on the ice. Be sure to take a hot drink like hot chocolate. You should move around to stay warm. Some people take ice skates. The third tip is to check the ice. Look at it carefully. The ice must be 4 or more inches thick. This is the ice rule: Thick and blue, tried and true. Thin and crispy, way too risky. Thick ice is safe for ice fishing. Thin ice is dangerous. The fourth tip is to take the right tools. You need to drill a hole in the ice with an ice drill. Then make the hole bigger with a chopping tool, like an ax. You need to carry your bait in a bait bucket. Use worms or small fish for bait. You need a chair to sit on. Take a folding chair so you can carry it easily. Be sure to take your fish hooks and fishing rod! Pull all your tools on a sled. Take your cell phone. You might need to call for help. The fifth tip is to have a great time! Questions: 1) You need ear flaps over your ears to A. keep water out of your ears. B. protect your ears from noise. C. keep your ears warm. D. Both A and B are correct. 2) You should move around to A. keep warm in the cold weather. B. keep from falling in the water. C. scare the large animals away. D. make the fish come to you. 3) How should you check the ice? A. Look at the ice carefully. B. Chop a hole in the ice. C. Drill a hole in the ice. D. Skate on the ice. 4) What can you use for bait? A. Hot chocolate B. Small fish C. Worms D. Both B and C are correct. 5) How thick must the ice be? A. 2 inches B. 3 inches C. 4 inches D. 5 inches Vocabulary: 1) Tents are A. hats B. boots C. heaters D. shelters 2) Another way to say check is A. look over carefully. B. cut with an ax. C. follow the rule. D. use the right tool. 3) Something that is risky is A. safe. B. thick. C. crispy. D. dangerous. 4) What is bait? A. Something the fish want to eat B. A kind of pail or bucket C. Something to sit on D. None of the above. 5) A folding chair is a chair that A. you should take ice fishing. B. you can fold to make smaller. C. you can carry easily. D. All of the above.

194 englishforeveryone.org Leonardo da Vinci Reading Comprehension Informational Passages (4) Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. Leonardo da Vinci was born in 1452 in the area of Florence, Italy. He did many things. He was a scientist. He was an inventor - he made new things. He was a musician. He was a mathematician. He was an architect he knew how to plan the construction of buildings. He knew about animals. He knew about plants. He could do many things well. He was very talented. He was famous for his painting. He painted the Mona Lisa and The Last Supper. They are his most famous paintings. Many people know about them. He started working on The Last Supper in 1495 in Milan. He finished it in He started working on the Mona Lisa in 1503 in Italy. He finished it a short time before he died. It is now in France. Leonardo s paintings were very good. He understood how bodies worked. He knew how happy or sad people looked. He knew how emotion looked on people s faces. He understood nature, light, and shadow. His paintings looked real. Leonardo had many ideas for inventions. He drew plans for a helicopter. He drew plans for a tank. He had an idea for a calculator. He had an idea for making solar power, which is power that comes from the sun. Leonardo lived at the same time as Michelangelo and Raphael. He was 27 years older than Michelangelo. He was 31 years older than Raphael. Leonardo died in Questions: 1) When did Leonardo start the Mona Lisa? Vocabulary: 1) An inventor is someone who A B C D ) Where is the Mona Lisa now? A. In Florence B. In France C. In Milan D. None of the above 3) What was one of Leonardo s talents? A. He could dance. B. He was a pilot. C. He could cook. D. He knew math. 4) What was one of Leonardo s ideas? A. He drew plans for a helicopter. B. He made drawings of a TV. C. He got power from plants. D. He built a zoo. 5) Leonardo was 27 years older than A. Raphael. B. Aristotle. C. Socrates. D. Michelangelo. A. knows about math. B. makes power. C. makes new things. D. understands light and shadow. 2) An architect is a person who A. can play music. B. plans buildings. C. invents new machines. D. paints beautiful paintings. 3) Any person who is talented A. can do something well. B. understands shadow. C. can fly a helicopter. D. makes solar power. 4) The best synonym for emotions is A. health. B. shadows. C. feelings. D. None of the above. 5) What is another way to say solar? A. Related to talent B. Related to nature C. Related to the sun D. Related to painting

195 englishforeveryone.org Soda Pop Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. Soda pop has an interesting story. The story begins with mineral water. Mineral water comes from springs. In many places, people take baths in mineral water. They say washing with mineral water is good for their health. Some say drinking mineral water is also good for people. Mineral water has bubbles in it. People learned to make bubbly water in the 1770 s. They added CO2 to water with a machine to make the water bubbly. The machine was the soda fountain. They called the new bubbly water soda water or carbonated water. American drug stores sold soda water. Druggists put good-tasting flavors in the soda water. People drank soda water for their health. Many people liked it for its good flavor. Many people went to the soda fountain every day. Most soda fountains were in drug stores or ice cream shops. In the early 1900 s, people bought soda water in bottles. Later in the 1900 s, people started to buy flavored soda water in cans. Now it is sold in many containers in grocery stores and other places where food is sold. Some people call it pop. Some say soda. Other people call it cola, tonic, or soda pop. Questions: 1) People said mineral water baths were A. good for people s health. B. best in the spring time. C. good tasting. D. Both A and B are correct. 2) What was a soda fountain? A. A drug store B. A bath machine C. A machine which made ice cream D. A machine which made bubbly water 3) At first, Americans bought soda water A. at ice cream shops. B. at grocery stores. C. at drug stores. D. Both A and C are correct. 4) Where does mineral water come from? A. Soda fountains B. Ice machines C. Machines D. Springs 5) Soda and pop are A. both mineral water. B. both soda water. C. the same thing. D. Both B and C are correct. Vocabulary: 1) Bathing is A. drinking water. B. washing with water. C. selling bubbly water. D. putting bubbles in water. 2) Bubbly water is A. good tasting. B. a drug. C. fizzy. D. cold. 3) Carbonated water is water with A. CO2. B. bubbles. C. good-tasting things added. D. Both A and B are correct. 4) A flavor is A. ice cream. B. a drink. C. a taste. D. soda. 5) Grocery stores are A. drug stores. B. food stores. C. soda fountains. D. ice cream shops.

196 englishforeveryone.org Tea Reading Comprehension Informational Passages Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. People drink a lot of tea. There are many kinds of tea. There is black tea. There is green tea. There is white tea. There is red tea. There is yellow tea. People drink a lot of tea in China. Some people drink it because it is good for them. It makes them healthy. Other people drink it because it tastes very good. It tastes delicious. People drink a lot of green tea in Japan. People drink a lot of green tea in Korea too. In Vietnam, some people drink coffee before they drink tea. People drink a lot of tea in England. Every afternoon, English people drink tea. English people add milk to their tea. Finally, many people drink tea in the U.S. In the South, people drink sweet tea. Sweet tea is cold black tea with sugar. Most tea comes from China. Some tea comes from India or Sri Lanka. Kenya, Japan, and Indonesia also grow a lot of tea. Questions: 1) Some tea is A. purple. B. green. C. pink. D. blue. 2) People drink coffee before tea in A. China. B. Korea. C. England. D. Vietnam. 3) People add milk to their tea in A. India. B. England. C. Vietnam. D. Sri Lanka. 4) People drink sweet tea in A. The Southern U.S. B. The Northern U.S. C. Vietnam. D. Korea. E. Sri Lanka 5) Most tea comes from A. Indonesia. B. Kenya. C. Japan. D. China. Vocabulary: 1) Tea makes them healthy. So, tea A. tastes good. B. is many colors. C. is good for them. D. comes from many places. 2) Things that are delicious A. are green. B. are yellow. C. taste very good. D. are good for you. 3) Before means A. in front of. B. during. C. earlier or sooner than. D. Both A and C are correct. 4) If you add milk to tea, you A. put milk in your tea. B. take milk out of your tea. C. drink milk after tea. D. drink milk before tea. 5) Something sweet A. is good for you. B. has sugar in it. C. tastes bad. D. is yellow.

197 englishforeveryone.org Tennis Reading Comprehension Informational Passages (4) Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below. Tennis is a sport played between two players (singles) or between two teams of two players (doubles). Each player uses a tennis racket to strike a hollow rubber ball covered with felt. To win, you must hit the ball into the opponent s court without the opponent being able to hit the ball back. Tennis originated in the United Kingdom in the late 19 th century. At first, people played tennis on courts made of grass! These were called lawn courts. Now, tennis is played by millions of people all over the world. The rules of tennis have changed very little since it was created in the 1890s. Most tennis players play tennis because it is fun. It also is a good way to get exercise. While playing tennis, you do a lot of running. You move your arms and legs in many ways that they do not normally move. Questions: 1) What do you use to hit a tennis ball? A. A bat B. A striker C. A racket D. None of the above 2) people can play tennis at once. A. One B. Two C. Four D. Both B and C 3) Where did tennis originate? A. Australia B. Asia C. The United States D. The United Kingdom 4) When did people start playing tennis? A. The late 18 th century. B. The late 19 th century. C. The late 1800s. D. Both B and C. 5) Why do most people play tennis? A. Because it is fun. B. Because they want to win. C. Because they don t have a basketball. D. Both A and B Vocabulary: 1) If you strike something, you A. hit it. B. smash it. C. hold it. D. cross it out. 2) A tennis ball is hollow. This means A. it is solid. B. is filled with water. C. it has air inside it. D. None of the above. 3) What is the opposite of opponent? A. Enemy B. Teammate C. Ally D. Both B and C 4) The passage talks about where tennis originated. So, the passage talks about A. where tennis came from. B. how tennis is played. C. how tennis is scored. D. Both B and C. 5) You do a lot of running in tennis. This means you A. do a good deal of running. B. need to run very much. C. need to run very frequently. D. All of the above.

198 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Just One Touch Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I am sitting in a chair next to Momma s bed. I am watching her get ready for a party. She opens the beautiful jewelry box on her nightstand. It is the size of a shoebox. It is wooden. It has colorful stones on top. They are red, green, yellow and blue. To me, the box looks magical. It looks like it has special powers. Now, you know you must never touch this box, right? Momma says. I feel like she knows exactly what I am thinking. I just want to touch it. I just want to open it. I just want to try on all the jewelry inside and dance around the room! Yes, Momma, I say. I know. What do I know? I know Momma has always told me not to touch the box. She has said it since I was a little girl. You are not old enough to wear my jewelry, Momma says. I am 11-years-old now! What is the big deal? I know that when Momma puts on the rings and bracelets from the box, she looks different. She seems to glow. There is one necklace with a yellow stone like a tiger s eye. When Momma puts this on, she seems to float instead of walk. Her feet do not seem to touch the ground. She moves lightly and gracefully. She moves without effort. Momma kisses me goodnight. She leaves for the party. I run to the window to wave to her, but she is already gone. Tonight I am very curious. Just one touch I sit on the edge of Momma s bed. I place my hand on the nightstand. I pause. I think.

199 My hand moves up and rests on the jewelry box. The box quickly flips open by itself! Jewels fly into the air. They dance around my head. I feel strange. I fall down to the floor. I wake up in a place I have never seen before. Questions: 1) Where does most of this story take place? A. at a party B. in a pretend place C. outside a window D. in Momma's bedroom 2) Who is telling the story? A. Momma B. a young girl C. Momma's friend D. a make-believe person 3) At the beginning of the story, where is the girl sitting? A. in a chair B. on the bed C. on the floor D. next to the window 4) The jewelry box looks magical. What does this mean? A. It looks simple. B. It looks expensive. C. It looks like it has special powers. D. It looks like it was made a long time ago. 5) What does Momma tell her daughter about the box? A. that it is magical B. that she must never touch it C. that the jewels are expensive D. that she can touch it when she is older 6) Where is Momma going? A. 7) What does the jewelry box look like? Check all that are correct. A. It is brown. B. It is wooden. C. It is the size of a shoebox. D. It has colored stones on top. 8) Which word best describes how the girl feels about the jewelry box? A. angry B. curious C. in love D. scared

200 Questions (continued): 9) When does the girl say Momma seems to glow? A. when she puts on make-up B. when she puts on a necklace C. when she puts on the rings and bracelets D. when she puts on nice shoes and a fancy dress 10) What does the girl seem to be thinking about when she sits on the edge of the bed? A. going to a party B. how to open the box C. dancing around the room D. if she should touch the box 11) How old is the girl? A. 12) What does the reader learn about the box? A. It is evil. B. It can fly. C. It is very heavy. D. It has special powers. 13) What does it mean if something is a big deal? A. It is a heavy thing. B. It is very important. C. It cannot be forgotten. D. It can make a lot of money. 14) What does the girl mean when she says that Momma seems to float? A. that Momma is swimming B. that Momma looks like a boat C. that it is difficult for Momma to move D. that Momma moves without much effort 15) How might the end of the story make a reader feel? Check all that are correct. A. unsure of what has happened B. curious about the power of the box C. sure that the girl is in danger D. wondering what happens next

201 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Martin is in a hurry. He is late to work again. Late Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Martin's boss doesn't like it when he is late. Martin was late last week. His boss told him not to be late again. You can t be late anymore, said Martin s boss. "I mean it." Martin thinks he might lose his job if he is late again. The time is now 7:15 am. Martin needs to be to work by 7:30. It takes him 22 minutes to drive to work. Things don t look good, he says to himself. Martin runs out of the house. He jumps in his car. He puts the car in reverse. He backs up without looking. BOOM! There is a sound like someone hitting a drum. Martin s car jerks to a stop. He has hit the car parked behind him. Oh no! Martin exclaims. He is angry now. Martin looks at his watch. It is 7:18. He needs to get to work. He looks around. There is no one on the street. There is no one nearby. He looks in the parked car. It is empty. Martin drives off quickly. He gets to work 10 minutes late. Martin s boss is not around. Thank goodness, he says to himself. He stops worrying. He sits at his desk to work. During lunch, Martin goes out to the parking lot. He looks at his car. There is a big dent in the back. Then he thinks about the other car - the car he hit this morning. "I know that car is damaged too," he thinks. He feels guilty. That was not right, Martin says to himself. He will see if the car is still outside his house when he gets off work.

202 Questions: 1) Martin is in a hurry. What does this mean? A. He is running. B. He is angry. C. He is late. D. He is moving fast. 2) Why is Martin in a hurry? A. 3) Martin's boss says, "I mean it." What does this mean? A. He is serious. B. He is angry. C. He is emotional. D. He is interested. 4) What does Martin think will happen if he is late to work again? A. He will get a pay cut. B. He will need to buy a watch. C. He will get fired from his job. D. He will need to adjust his schedule. 5) What time does Martin need to be at work? A. 7) What is the loud noise? A. Martin yelling B. police sirens sounding C. Martin driving off the road D. Martin hitting someone s car 6) If Martin leaves the house at 7:15, what time would he get to work? A. 7:32 B. 7:37 C. 7:40 D. 7:52 8) Martin checks if there is anyone nearby. What does nearby mean? A. in B. next to C. close to D. far (away) from 9) Why doesn't Martin get in trouble with his boss today? A. His boss is not around. B. He gets to work on time. C. His boss feels sorry for him. D. Martin says he is sorry for being late. 10) Who does Martin talk to during the story? Check all that are correct. A. his boss B. his friends C. himself D. the driver of the other car

203 Questions (continued): 11) How do Martin's feelings change during the story? A. from hurried, to guilty, to angry B. from angry, to guilty, to hurried C. from hurried, to angry, to guilty D. from angry, to hurried, to angry 12) Why did Martin look around after he hit the car? A. He needed help. B. He wanted a ride to work. C. He needed to check the time. D. He wanted to check if anyone saw him. 13) What does it mean to feel guilty? A. to feel bad about doing something B. to feel worried about doing something C. to feel unsure about doing something D. to feel like you want to change something 14) What might Martin do if the car he hit is still there after work? Check all that are correct. A. He might hit it again. B. He might try to find the owner. C. He might try to hide the dent. D. He might leave a note on the car with his name and number. Do you think Martin is a good employee? Why or why not?

204 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Love Train Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. When I was a little girl, I loved for my mom to tell me stories about herself. No matter how tired she was, she never adumbrated them. She would fill the tales with the minutest details, and they were always fascinating. Another thing she did was tell the stories with such grandiloquence! Then she would stop and say, Now what do you think that word means? I would try to piece together what was happening in the story and make my best guess. To this day, when I want to bug my friends, I use the huge words I first learned leaning on Mom's shoulder as she recounted a snippet of her life. My favorite story was the one about how my mom met my dad: I was 17-years-old, but I already knew the kind of man I would marry. Take note:" He would not be too garrulous. I tell you, Rosa, it s important for a man to take time to listen to what you have to say." And never impertinent. I ll never forget when I was 16; a boy from my church named Joe Turner came and knocked on our door. He didn t look my momma in the eye, and didn t say, Hello. He just leaned against the door jam and said, Rosa here? " My momma raised her brow and said, She is, but not for boys such as yourself. " But I digress. I m supposed to be telling you about the day I met your daddy, right?" Okay, so I was riding the Amtrak train between Providence and Philadelphia during my freshman year at Brown, and the door at the end of my car rattled open." He was tall and swarthy. He wore a thick ivory cable knit sweater with a gray wool scarf wrapped firmly around his neck. I couldn t tell what his heritage was and that intrigued me. What was he -- Indian, Portuguese, Peruvian? Mom would pause here and I would shout, Cape Verdean! She d continue. Well, if I had been shy, I might have just looked out the train window. But then where would I be now? You wouldn t even be here! So I let my eyes lock with his as he wobbled down the moving train."

205 He smiled a slight smile, not a big one. His eyes raised just enough to let me know he had spotted me too. I always loved this line and would smile at the image of my dad stumbling down the train and then noticing my radiant mom. So Rosa, once we spotted each other, your dad found infinite reasons to walk past me to go to the café car." "I was sitting by myself along the aisle. So finally, I just slid over to the window, leaving the seat next to me empty." Your dad came back with two cups of hot cocoa and sat down with a smile. And we had the most delightful conversation!" I could tell right then that this was no ephemeral crush this was the real deal. I was going to end up loving this man forever. Here comes the part I loved best about the story. We pull into the train station in Philadelphia, and it s time for me to get off. He was heading on to Washington where he was going to school." I prepared myself for some hackneyed expression as I got off the train. You know, Great meeting you, or You re the apple of my eye. " "I also worried he might try to sneak a smooch, which would have been a big turn off. We'd just met!" "Instead, he took my hand gently and gave it a little squeeze. He said, If it s the thought that counts, consider yourself kissed. Mama said she just about died when he said that! Then she said to herself, That man will be my husband. And so he is. Questions: 1) As used in this passage, which is the best antonym for adumbrated? A. detailed B. lengthened C. invented D. simplified E. understated 2) As used in the passage, what is the meaning of grandiloquence? A. technical jargon B. archaic speech C. pithy expression D. pompous language E. foreign word or phrase

206 Questions (continued): 3) What is ironic about the title of this passage? A. Rosa's mother does not like clichés. B. The passage has nothing to do with a song. C. It is where Rosa's mother meets her husband-to-be. D. The train only went a short distance but their love was forever. E. Rosa's mother could not have possibly loved her father after such a short train ride. 4) Why might the author have chosen Rosa as the narrator even though it is her mother who is telling the main story? A. to make the story harder to follow B. to make the story seem more straightforward C. to make it clear that Rosa s mother has passed away D. to make it clear that the story happened a long time ago E. so that the reader could learn the story from Rosa's perspective 5) As used in the passage, what is the meaning of garrulous? A. conceited B. loquacious C. narrow-minded D. obsequious E. patronizing 6) Which best situation describes someone who has been impertinent? A. A man crashes into the car in front of him. B. A student gestures rudely to his teacher. C. A child rushes out the door, forgetting to say good-bye to his mom. D. A woman refuses to let her son play video games before school. E. A dog chases all the cats in the neighborhood.

207 Questions (continued): 7) Which is the best antonym for digress? A. stop B. stray C. shorten D. remember E. stay on course 8) What may Rosa be meaning to convey to her child by telling this story? A. advice on what to look for in a partner B. a regret that she met her husband on a train C. the suggestion that Rosa might find her husband on a train D. a yearning to go back to that time and place E. the idea that education should come before marriage 9) Judging from the passage, what does Rosa's mother find most important in a husband? Check three that are correct. A. humor B. politeness C. originality D. respectfulness E. heroism 10) What is implied in the following paragraph? "Well, if I had been shy, I might have just looked out the train window. Where would I be now? You wouldn t even be here! But I let my eyes lock with his as he wobbled down the moving train." A. that Rosa really wanted to just look out the window B. that it is best to be outspoken in all circumstances C. that as soon as they locked eyes they fell in love D. that a slight change in circumstances could have greatly altered her life E. that the story took place before technology allowed trains to offered smooth ride

208 Questions (continued): 11) As used in this passage, what is the meaning of ephemeral? A. fleeting B. permanent C. ridiculous D. serious E. young 12) Which is the best antonym for hackneyed? A. happy B. humorous C. original D. over-used E. turbulent Do you like this story? What is your favorite part? What is your least favorite part? What could you do to make it better?

209 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Music Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. There are many different kinds of music. There is jazz music. There is rock music. There is rap music. There is country music. There is classical music. Do you like music? Questions: 1) What does kinds mean in this passage? A. artists B. types C. instruments 2) Which is not a kind of music? A. fun music B. classical music C. rock music 3) How many different kinds of music are listed in the passage? A. three B. four C. five 4) If you like music, then you think it is. A. good B. okay C. bad What is your favorite kind of music? Why?

210 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My Family Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Hi, my name is Eric. I want to talk about my family. I have two sisters. Their names are Rachel and Carrie. Rachel is 18 years old. Carrie is 10 years old. They are very nice. My mother's name is Julia. She is 40 years old. My mother is also very nice. My father's name is Andre. He is smart. He is an engineer. He builds bridges. I also have a dog. My dog's name is Paw. He is a big dog. He is a brown dog. He is a big brown dog. I love my family.

211 Questions: 1) How many sisters do I have? A. one B. two C. three D. four 2) How old is my mom? A. twenty-five B. thirty C. thirty-five D. forty 3) My dad is A. a doctor. B. a lawyer. C. an engineer. D. a construction worker. 4) What is the name of my dog? A. 5) What color is my dog? A. He is white. B. He is black. C. He is brown. D. He is yellow. 6) What is the name of my younger sister? A. 7) What is the name of my older sister? A. 8) Is my dog small or big? A. He is small. B. He is big.

212 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My Friend Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I have a friend. My friend lives in California. My friend is a girl. She is seventeen years old. Her name is Jessica Roberts. Jessica is cool. I like her a lot. She likes to read. She is a good reader. She is good at math too. It is her best subject. Jessica is smart. I like to eat lunch with her. We eat lunch on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday. Jessica is my friend. Questions: 1) Where does my friend live? A. Colorado B. Texas C. California 2) Is my friend a girl or a boy? A. She is a girl. B. He is a boy. 3) How old is my friend? A. 15 years old B. 16 years old C. 17 years old 4) What is my friend's first name? A. Jenny B. Jessica C. Julia

213 Questions (continued): 5) What is my friend's last name? A. Rowan B. Randal C. Roberts 6) What is Jessica's best subject? A. English B. Math C. Science 7) For how many days a week do I eat lunch with Jessica? A. 3 B. 5 C. 7 Do you have a good friend? What is he or she like? What things do you like to do together?

214 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My House Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. My house is in the United States. I live in the United States. The United States is a country. I like living in the US. My house is in North Carolina. I live in North Carolina. North Carolina is a state. The weather in NC is nice. It is sunny. The sky is blue. My house is in Chapel Hill. I live in Chapel Hill. Chapel Hill is a city. It is a city on a hill. My house is red. My house is brick. I live in a red brick house. Questions: 1) What is the United States? A. a city B. a state C. a country 2) What is North Carolina? A. a city B. a state C. a country 3) What is Chapel Hill? A. a city B. a state C. a country 4) How is the weather in Chapel Hill? A. rainy B. sunny C. cloudy 5) What is the house made of? A. wood B. brick C. metal 6) What color is the house? A. red B. blue C. yellow 7) What is a hill? A. a forest B. a large river C. a small mountain

215 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 New Shoes for Maddy Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Maddy loves to jump rope, scooter and ride her skateboard. One day, Maddy gets a hole in the shoes she likes best while riding her scooter. They are pink with hearts and a Velcro tab. Now she needs new shoes. Maddy's mom takes her to the shoe store Saturday morning. The store fills with people looking for shirts, dresses, pants and toys. Maddy's mom takes her to the shoe area. The shoe area is crowded, and there is a long wait. Maddy does not mind. Maddy sees a pair of purple sneakers with orange laces. She sees a pair of red sandals with dots. She sees a pair of green flip-flops. She wants the purple sneakers. "But you do not know how to tie your laces," says Maddy's mom. "I will learn," says Maddy. Maddy's mother thinks. She does not want to tie Maddy's laces each morning before school. "If we buy the purple sneakers, you must learn to tie them before you can wear them to school," says Maddy's mom. "I will! I promise!" says Maddy. She is very happy. Maddy practices tying her laces for the rest of the day. She practices more on Sunday. Finally, she learns how to tie her laces. She gets to wear her new shoes to school on Monday. "I did it," she says with a big smile. Questions: 1) Why does Maddy need new shoes? A. Her shoes are too small. B. Her shoes are very old. C. She lost her favorite shoes. D. She got a hole in her shoes. 2) How does Maddy get a hole in her shoes? A. riding her skateboard B. riding her scooter C. jumping rope D. playing basketball

216 Questions (continued): 3) Which shoes have a hole? A. the green flip-flops B. the red sandals C. the pink shoes with hearts D. the purple sneakers 4) Which shoes does Maddy want to buy? A. the pink shoes with hearts B. the purple sneakers C. the green flip-flops D. the red sandals with dots 5) How does Maddy feel about the long wait at the store? A. She is mad about it. B. She is sad about it. C. She is excited about it. D. She feels okay about it. 6) Who does Maddy see in the store? A. a lot of people B. her older sister C. her friends from school D. one of her neighbors 7) When can Maddy wear her shoes to school? A. when she learns how to tie B. as soon as she leaves the store C. after summer vacation D. tomorrow 8) In paragraph 8, what does the word promise mean? A. that Maddy wants to learn to tie B. that Maddy will learn to tie C. that Maddy cannot learn to tie D. that Maddy might learn to tie 9) What does Maddy's mom NOT want to do? A. buy Maddy new shoes B. buy Maddy green flip-flops C. buy more than one pair of shoes D. tie Maddy's shoes in the morning 10) How might Maddy feel after learning to tie? Check all that are correct. A. happy B. proud C. shy D. sick 11) What lesson did Maddy learn? A. Practice makes perfect. B. Do not ride a scooter with pink shoes. C. Be careful what you wish for. D. School is fun with new shoes.

217 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Paul Cooks Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Paul loves to read cookbooks. His wife gets him one on his birthday. Paul tells her he will try to make a new recipe for three days in a row. On Monday, Paul makes blueberry pancakes for breakfast. He gets the blueberries from the farmer's market. On Tuesday, Paul makes beef soup for dinner. He puts in cubes of beef, carrots and onions. The recipe calls for cream, but Paul does not like cream. He uses water instead. On Wednesday, Paul makes a tomato salad with cucumbers and onions. He picks the cucumbers and tomatoes from his garden. He likes this dish best. It was also the easiest for him to make. Questions: 1) What does Paul love to read? A. 2) Who gives Paul a cookbook? A. 3) What does Paul say he will do? A. become a chef B. grow his own food C. cook every recipe in a week D. try a new recipe for three days in a row 4) On what day does Paul make pancakes? A.

218 Questions (continued): 5) What does Paul get from the farmer's market? A. 6) Where does Paul get cucumbers and tomatoes? A. from his wife B. from the store C. from his garden D. from the farmer s market 7) Which dish does Paul like best? A. the blue one B. beef soup C. tomato salad D. blueberry pancakes 8) Why doesn't Paul use cream? A. He doesn t like it. B. There was none at the store. C. There was none in the garden. D. There was none at the farmer's market. 9) What does Paul use instead of cream? A. 10) Which dish was the easiest for Paul to make? A. Do you like to cook? What is your favorite dish?

219 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Pigs Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Pigs are interesting animals. They have four legs. They have a small tail. They have a round, flat nose. Their nose is called a snout. They make funny sounds. They grunt and squeal. They lay in the mud to keep cool. A pig will eat almost anything! Questions: 1) What does a snout look like? A. small and fat B. round and flat C. long and thin D. big and square 2) What might a pig do if it is hot? A. take a shower B. drink warm water C. move into the barn D. lay in a puddle of mud 3) What does a pig eat? A. corn B. meat C. carrots D. all of the above Do you like pigs? Why or why not?

220 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My name is Mimi. Today is July 5th, Today is a rainy day. I am happy today. Why am I happy? I am happy because it is raining! Is that strange? Maybe. Rainy Day Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. But I like it when it rains. The rain makes me happy. I like rainy days. I do not like sunny days. I like the sound of the rain. I like the clouds. The clouds are gray. The clouds are big. I like the rain. Questions: 1) What is my name? A. 2) What is the date today? A. March 4th, 2012 B. July 5th, 2010 C. April 10th, 1990 D. November 28th, ) Why am I happy? A. because it is your birthday B. because you passed the test C. because it is raining D. because you won the game 4) Do I like sunny days? A. Yes. B. No. 5) What color are the clouds? A. red B. blue C. gray D. green 6) What do I like about the rain? Check all that are correct. A. the sound B. the smell C. the clouds D. the temperature

221 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Remains of a Marriage Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Leave it. Kelsey could not begin to fathom what she was hearing. In fact, a part of her began to feel she was in some sort of dream, unable to emerge to wakefulness. Even the contractor appeared flabbergasted. His mouth stayed in a half-open position, like a marionette waiting for its strings to be tugged. Yes. Leave it, Robert said again. He was speaking to the notion that someone in the room had asked him to clarify his words. No one had, but Robert had understood the silence. What were the chances that an Indian burial ground would be found on the bucolic site where Robert and Kelsey had chosen to build their dream home? Why in the world would Robert not want to have the remains carted away, thought Kelsey. The last thing they needed were Indian poltergeists meandering around their home while the two of them were trying to renovate their marriage. Kelsey, usually deferential to her husband, knew that now was the time to make her position heard. She tried to cajole Robert from the direction he was heading. Sweetheart, she whinnied. We don t want to build on a site with human remains. It would be irreverent to the dead. Immediately, she saw contempt in Robert s eyes; it was a subtle reminder of how he often viewed her as superficial and self-absorbed. What would be irreverent, said Robert, his voice dripping with condescension, would be to desecrate these Native graves and move them from their final resting place. Remember the culture. No, Kelsey did not remember the culture. She could care less about the culture. However, Robert, the history professor, was obviously enthralled by the contractor s findings. He had an innate way of understanding other cultures and other people that amazed Kelsey. He did not have that gift with her. But something inside Kelsey said this was too much. She believed wholeheartedly in ghosts and could not imagine a life of them haunting her, rattling her cupboards, and shaking her floorboards. Kelsey had an unnerving sensation that big problems were ahead.

222 Questions: 1) Why can't Kelsey fathom what her husband says at the beginning of the passage? A. She could not hear what Robert said. B. She could not believe what he said. C. She had not yet seen the remains. D. She could not think of a retort to his comment. 2) Which is the best synonym for flabbergasted? A. dumbfounded B. intuitive C. querulous D. tactful 3) What is the term given to the comparison of the contractor to a marionette? A. an allusion, meaning a figure of speech making casual reference to a literary figure B. an analogy, meaning an extended comparison showing the similarities between two things C. a denotation, meaning the literal definition of a word D. a hyperbole, meaning a gross exaggeration 4) "He was speaking to the notion that someone in the room had asked him to clarify his words." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. He was speaking as if he had asked himself to clarify his words. B. He was speaking as if the contractor or Kelsey had asked him to clarify his words. C. He was speaking as if he heard a question but was not sure who asked it. D. He was speaking as if a ghost in the room had asked him to clarify his words. 5) Why is the title of this passage ironic? A. Nothing remains of the marriage. B. It is not clear Robert and Kelsey are married. C. Remains have been found on the property. D. Kelsey and Robert are having trouble with their marriage. 6) What can be said about the house Robert and Kelsey are planning to build? Check all that are correct. A. It will be haunted. B. It will be in the city. C. Kelsey considers it their dream house. D. It will be in the country.

223 Questions (continued): 7) If Kelsey had chosen to be deferential to her husband, what would she have most likely said? A. "Good idea." B. "Don't be silly." C. "I'll leave you." D. "I love you." 8) "She tried to cajole Robert from the direction he was heading." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. She tried to compromise with Robert. B. She tried to force Robert from the direction he was heading. C. She tried to gently prod Robert from the direction he was heading. D. She tried to give Robert veiled threats about the direction he was heading. 9) Which is the best antonym for desecrate? A. honor B. excavate C. defile D. criticize 10) What does the reader learn about Kelsey and Robert's marriage? A. It seems busy. B. It seems blissful. C. It seems strained. D. It seems good-natured. 11) What about Robert seems to keep him from wanting to move the gravesite? A. He is controlling. B. He fears the Indians. C. He cares about history. D. He doesn't want to build a house. Do you think Robert and Kelsey should build on the burial ground? Explain.

224 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Running Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Dieter loves to run. He runs in the morning. He runs in the afternoon. He runs in the evening. He runs at night. Dieter loves to run, but it hurts to run. When Dieter runs, it hurts. His legs hurt. His arms hurt. His back hurts. His head hurts. When Dieter runs, his whole body hurts. Then, Dieter starts thinking. He starts dreaming He dreams about his job. He dreams about his home. He dreams about his family. He dreams about his friends. He dreams about the world. At first, running hurts. No one likes it when it hurts. When it hurts, Dieter dreams about things that do not hurt. This is why Dieter loves running. Running gives him the best dreams. Sometimes, Dieter forgets that he is running. Sometimes, he runs all morning. Sometimes, he runs all afternoon. Sometimes, he runs all night. Dieter runs and dreams. Questions: 1) What does Dieter love to do? A. 2) When Dieter runs, he hurts. What does this mean? A. He feels good. B. He feels bad. 3) What does Dieter do while he is running? A. He dreams. B. He sleeps. C. He eats D. He drinks. 4) Why does Dieter love running? A. because it hurts B. because he is healthy C. because it gives him the best dreams D. because it gives him more energy 5) What is one thing that Dieter dreams about? A.

225 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Scorpion Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Soon after Navi got engaged to Roberto, she went to meet his family in Mexico. She had heard many a story of Roberto s birth city of Guanajuato, and they had all captivated her. At one time, this colonial city was the source of two-thirds of the world s silver. Our family goes to a beautiful church in Guanajuato, Roberto had told her while they courted in the United States. It is said that silver dust was mixed into the cement building blocks and that is why the church sparkles. Navi had been enthralled. Roberto always told such wonderful stories. She could not wait to see the city and meet all of Roberto s family. Navi was an artist and knew that the trip would inspire her to create. While Roberto had imparted Navi with all the wonders of his beautiful city, it had not occurred to him to mention any dangers. They were young. They were in love. They lived only in the moment. Navi was speechless when she saw the Oratorio de San Felipe. It really does sparkle! she exclaimed. Navi kissed Roberto on the cheek. I ll meet you outside, she said, leaving the church. She pulled her sketchpad and pencils from her bag and went to sit against one of the glorious palm trees outside the church. She began sketching the colossal cupola which extended three stories above the nave. Suddenly, a sharp pain took hold of her left shoulder. It felt like an electrical shock. The pain began to pervade the rest of her body. She had been stung by a pernicious scorpion! The last thing Navi remembered was Roberto kneeling by her side. She woke up a week later with him holding her hand and telling her a story. In Mexico, scorpions are ubiquitous. There are more scorpion deaths here than in any other place in the world. And they love palm trees, he said, rubbing her hand with tears of relief in his eyes. I should have mentioned that before.

226 Questions: 1) Which is the best antonym for captivated? A. dishonored B. enthralled C. repelled D. saddened 2) Which of the following sentences most clearly foreshadows that something bad will happen? A. They lived only in the moment. B. It had not occurred to him to mention any dangers. C. Suddenly, a sharp pain took hold of her left shoulder. D. I ll meet you outside, she said, leaving the church. 3) According to the passage, which conditions may result from a scorpion sting? Check all that are correct. A. paralysis B. nausea C. pain D. unconsciousness 4) "They were young. They were in love. They lived only in the moment." Choose the best way to combine the above sentences. A. They were young and in love and they lived only in the moment. B. They were young and in love; they lived only in the moment. C. They were young and in love; therefore, they lived only in the moment. D. They were young and in love; conversely, they lived only in the moment. 5) Which is the best antonym for colossal? A. banal B. microscopic C. temporal D. uninspiring 6) What is the best synonym for pervade? A. numb B. paralyze C. permeate D. sicken

227 Questions (continued): 7) How does Roberto seem to feel about not having told Navi about scorpions? A. aloof B. perplexed C. remorseful D. validated 8) What is the best definition of pernicious? A. deadly B. evil C. sneaky D. territorial 9) What type of narrator is telling this story? A. first person, characterized as a person in the story. B. second person, characterized as speaking directly to the reader. C. third person omniscient, characterized as knowing what all the characters are thinking. D. third person focalized, characterized by knowing only what one character may be thinking 10) Which is the best antonym for ubiquitous? A. scarce B. benevolent C. harmless D. adulterated Do you think Navi should be upset at Roberto? Explain.

228 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Seeing Clearly Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The announcement that Donna had reached middle age came stealthily and without warning. Donna, at 42-years-old, was in perfect health. She was fit, trim and ate only the healthiest of foods, eschewing soda and candy. She was still asked for her identification when buying wine at the grocery store. She ran several miles every day, and in local road races, she was known for beating people half her age. Forty is the new twenty! her friends would say of Donna s seeming agelessness. Donna heard the quip so often that a part of her believed that this aging thing was surely for other people. That all changed during what should have been a fairly innocuous event: a trip to the Department of Motor Vehicles to renew her driver s license. Name? the clerk asked without looking up. Donna replied. Address? Donna gave it. Look through there, please, the clerk gestured toward an eye testing machine perched at the edge of the desk. Read the first four lines, she sighed. Donna pushed her head against the contraption. Go ahead. Donna was perplexed. Everything was fuzzy. I think the glass is dirty, Donna said, searching the desk for a tissue to wipe off the lens. It s not dirty, the clerk said, her voice dripping with condescension. There must be some problem, Donna said, pressing her head against the machine once more. Ma am, do you wear glasses? No, no, I don t, Donna responded, a little embarrassed now, as other people in the room began turning to see what was going on. The clerk glanced down at Donna s old license and back up at her. Welcome to middle age, sweetheart. Come back when you ve had an eye exam and gotten glasses.

229 Questions: 1) What proverb fits this story best? A. Time marches on. B. Time heals all wounds. C. A stitch in time saves nine. D. There is no time like the present. 2) Which is the best antonym for stealthily? A. honestly B. obviously C. slowly D. sneakily 3) If Donna is eschewing candy and soda, what is she doing? A. overindulging B. avoiding them C. eating them in moderation D. eating only the all-natural versions 4) Using the passage as a guide, which best describes the meaning of "Forty is the new twenty"? A. If you are in good health and shape, being 40 can feel like 20. B. When people turn 40, they are likely to say they are in their 20s. C. If you are 20, and not in great shape, you can feel like you are 40. D. If you stay away from junk food, you can look 40 even when you are 20. 5) Which is the best antonym for innocuous? A. dangerous B. difficult C. juvenile D. mature 6) What is the difference between the first four paragraphs of this passage and the rest? A. The first highlights Donna's pride, the last shows her anger. B. The first highlights the good life Donna has had, the last shows her regret. C. The first highlights Donna's youth, the last shows that she has aged. D. The first highlights Donna's fitness, the last shows she is out of shape.

230 Questions (continued): 7) Which best describes the clerk's attitude? A. hostile B. incoherent C. patronizing D. domineering 8) Which statements suggest condescension? Check all that are correct. A. It is not safe to go shopping at night. B. Take your dirty feet off my designer sofa. C. If you had studied, you would have done better on the test. D. If you had my fashion sense, you wouldn't have chosen that outfit to wear. 9) Which best describes the tone of this passage? A. angry B. dark C. lighthearted D. passionate 10) What is ironic about the clerk calling Donna "Ma'am"? A. It is not proper English. B. The clerk does not know Donna's name. C. It is a term often reserved for older people. D. It is unclear to whom the clerk is speaking. Do you feel younger than you actually are? Do you feel older? Explain.

231 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Seeing Stars Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Yana is my mother. Tony is my father. My name is Sasha. We live in a red house. We have a blue car. We sit in the yard at night. We look at the stars. Father tells me the stars make him happy. Mother tells me the stars make her want to sing. I like to guess how many stars are in the sky. We hear a baby cry next door. My mother sings. The baby stops crying. We think he heard my mother s pretty song. We all smile. Questions: 1) Who is Yana? A. Sasha's father B. Sasha s mother C. Tony's father D. Tony s mother 2) What color is Sasha's house? A.

232 Questions (continued): 3) Who is telling the story? A. Father B. Mother C. Sasha D. The baby 4) When do they sit in the yard? A. 5) How do the stars make Sasha's father feel? A. Funny. B. Happy. C. Like counting. D. Like singing. 6) What happens when Mother sings? A. A friend comes by. B. Father gets sleepy. C. Sasha counts stars. D. The baby stops crying. 7) What does Sasha like to do when she sees the stars? A. She likes to sit in the car. B. She likes to hold the baby. C. She likes to sing with her mother. D. She likes to guess how many there are. 8) What do Mother, Father and Sasha do at the end of the story? A. They cry. B. They laugh. C. They smile. D. They talk.

233 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Seeing Through Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Jeffrey brushed quickly past an elderly woman waiting on the platform ahead of him to get onto the subway. He wanted to be sure to get a seat to read his Financial Times. As the train screeched out of the station, he lifted his head from business news and stared at the man directly across from him. A fierce wave a tsunami of antipathy came over him. Jeffrey knew this man, knew him all too well. Their eyes locked. As the train reached full speed, the ruckus of speeding wheels against the winding rails and a wildly gyrating subway car filled Jeffrey s ears. To this frenetic beat, Jeffrey effortlessly listed in his head all the reasons this man, whose eyes he stared coldly into, was an anathema to him. He had climbed the upper echelons of his Wall Street firm using an imperious manner with his subordinates, always making sure everyone knew he was the boss. Despite his impoverished upbringing, he had become ostentatious. Flush with cash from the lucrative deals he had made on Wall Street, he had purchased a yacht and a home in Versailles. He used neither. But, oh, how he liked to say he had them. Meanwhile, Jeffrey knew, this man s parents were on the verge of being evicted from their run-down tenement apartment in the South Bronx. What bothered Jeffrey most about this man was that he never even attempted to make amends for his evil ways. Could this man change? Jeffrey did not know. He could try though. The train screeched to Jeffrey s stop at Battery Park. He gave the man one last hard look. See you around, he mumbled to himself. And he knew would, because Jeffrey had been glaring at his own reflection in the subway window. It would take years of hard work and therapy, but Jeffrey would one day notice this man again on the train and marvel at what a kinder person he had become.

234 Questions: 1) Which best describes Jeffrey's attitude in this passage? A. feral B. florid C. hapless D. impetuous E. self-loathing 2) A fierce wave a tsunami of antipathy came over him. Given the analogy in this sentence, which word would work best instead of came? A. angled B. drizzled C. rained D. swept E. trampled 3) Which is the best antonym for antipathy? A. ambivalence B. desperation C. ardor D. infatuation E. plethora 4) What statement makes the most sense from what is said in this passage? A. Jeffrey has few friends. B. Jeffrey knows himself well. C. Jeffrey has had a difficult life. D. Jeffrey is incapable of change. E. Jeffrey rides the subway frequently. 5) "As the train reached full speed, the cacophony of speeding wheels against the winding rails and a wildly gyrating train filled Jeffrey s ears." Which describes a literary technique used in this sentence? Check two that are correct. A. alliteration, characterized by the repetition of an initial letter or sound B. analogy, an extended comparison showing the similarities between two things C. imagery, characterized by appealing to any sense or combination of senses D. irony, characterized by a contrast or incongruity between what is stated and what is meant E. personification, characterized by something being described as if it were human

235 Questions (continued): 6) What is the main conflict in this passage? A. man verses man B. man verses himself C. man verses society D. man verses machine E. man verses nature 7) Which is the best definition for anathema? A. a person or thing that is detested B. a person or thing that is misunderstood C. a person or thing that needs spiritual guidance D. a person or thing that demonstrates evil ways E. a person or thing that has mental problems 8) What does it mean to have an imperious manner with underlings? A. to ignore them B. to be stoic around them C. to openly humiliate them D. to not be affected by them E. to be domineering toward them 9) Which is the best antonym for ostentatious? A. assiduous B. decadent C. modest D. miserly E. pretentious 10) What is made clear by the end of passage? Check all that are correct. A. that Jeffrey is wealthy B. that the man Jeffrey hates is himself C. that Jeffrey has been staring at a co-worker D. that Jeffrey will eventually become a better person E. that the old woman in the beginning of the passage is actually Jeffrey's mother

236 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Talia is going out to eat tonight. Talia s Special Day Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. It is a special day. She wants to look very nice for her night out. First, she gets her hair cut at a salon. A salon is a place where people go to get their hair and nails done. Then, she gets her finger nails painted pink. A woman who works at the salon paints Talia s nails. Talia is not happy with the color. She asks the woman to change the color to purple. She likes the purple very much. It is almost time to go out. Talia goes home and looks in her closet. She tries on a pair of light blue pants with a white shirt. She tries on a purple dress with a black belt. She tries on a brown skirt with a green top. She wears the purple dress. Many of her friends and family are at the restaurant when she gets there. She hugs her mother and father. She gives her grandfather a kiss. Talia s sister gives her a big smile. Her best friend, Asra, gives her a present. Talia is 25-years-old today. Happy Birthday, Talia, they say. You look great! I feel great because all of you are here, says Talia.

237 Questions: 1) What is Talia doing for her special day? A. She is having a party. B. She is going to her friend's house. C. She is making dinner. D. She is going to a restaurant. 2) Why does Talia want to look nice? A. It is her birthday. B. She is going on a trip. C. She is going to church. D. She is going to school. 3) What does Talia do first? A. She picks out a dress. B. She gets her nails painted. C. She gets her hair cut. D. She goes out to eat. 4) Why does Talia change the color of her nails? A. It does not match her dress. B. She is not happy with pink. C. Her friends tell her to change the color. D. She is not happy with purple. 5) What does Talia wear out? A. light blue pants B. a brown skirt C. a purple dress D. a green top 6) What does Talia do when she sees her parents? A. She smiles. B. She says hello. C. She gives them a hug. D. She gives them a kiss. 7) Who smiles at Talia? A. 8) How old is Talia? A. 9) What is a salon? A. a restaurant B. a place where people talk about business C. a gift shop D. a place to get hair and nails done 10) Why does Talia feel great? A. because she looks great B. because her friends and family are there C. because her hair is cut D. because her nails are purple

238 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Taste Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. People taste different things on different parts of the tongue. If something is sweet, like candy, we taste it on the tip of our tongue. If something is salty, like potato chips, we taste it just behind the tip. If something is sour, like a lemon, we taste it on the sides of our tongue. We taste bitter things, like dark chocolate, at the back of our tongue. Questions: 1) What is the main point of this passage? A. Our tongues have many different sides. B. We taste sour things on the sides of our tongue. C. We taste different things on different parts of our tongue. 2) According to the passage, which part of the tongue is likely to taste ice cream? A. the tip B. the back C. the sides 3) According to the passage, which food is tasted by the sides of the tongue? A. candy B. a lemon C. potato chips 4) Which is the best antonym for bitter? A. salty B. sour C. sweet What is your favorite food? Why?

239 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Tattoo Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Justin s mom had set down the house rules with aplomb. Only the most obtuse person would have failed to understand: no tattoos, no body piercings and no co-ed sleepovers while living in the house of Elaine Tucker Brown. Still, the day Justin turned 18, he lied to his mother about where he was going and headed straight to the tattoo parlor, as if impervious to his mother s wrath. He got a light blue heart the size of an orange permanently etched on his arm. Above this work of art was the word, Blessed. No, Justin was not stupid, but he was obstinate. Elaine saw this as an act of sheer defiance. She was incensed, her anger exacerbated by the fact that Justin had breezed into the house, found her in the kitchen, taken off his shirt with a smile and said, Got it! No, Justin. Let me tell you what you ve got, Elaine said angrily. You ve got five minutes to go upstairs and pack a bag. I m taking you to Pop-Pops. The ride to Pop-Pop s house was chilly, to say the least. Elaine berated Justin for everything she could think of, which wasn t much because he was a straight A senior with a full academic scholarship to his top college pick. He had a kind heart and started a foundation in the ninth grade, which donated used sporting equipment to underprivileged kids in South Africa. Elaine pulled up to her father s door and ordered Justin out. Not 10 minutes later, her cell phone rang. Elaine, have you lost it? You are kicking a boy as good as him out the house for a tattoo that says Blessed, no less? her father asked, incredulous. You will miss him so much. Don t cut off your nose to spite your face, Elaine. Come pick this young man up. Elaine, having grown up obeying most of her parents demands, turned her car around and went back to pick up her son. Justin was surprisingly contrite. Sorry for being so disrespectful, Mom, he said earnestly. I will try to follow house rules from now on.

240 Questions: 1) What other title would best fit this passage? A. House Rules B. Visiting Pop-Pop C. "Straight A's" D. Body Piercings 2) What details does the author include which may make the reader sympathetic to Justin? Check all that are correct. A. He is described as obstinate. B. He is portrayed as kindhearted. C. He is described as a straight A student. D. He is described as receiving a full scholarship to college. 3) Which proverb does Elaine learn in this passage? A. Don t make much ado about nothing. B. Familiarity breeds contempt. C. No arguments will give courage to the coward. D. If words suffice not, blows must follow. 4) Which proverb does Justin seem to learn by the end of this passage? A. Look before you leap. B. Pleasure bought with pain, hurts. C. Youth s first duty is reverence to parents. D. If men had all they wished, they would often be ruined. 5) Which is the best antonym for obtuse? A. foolhardy B. intelligent C. passionate D. stubborn 6) What was Justin's attitude when he showed his mother the tattoo? A. willfully defiant B. cautiously jubilant C. convincingly contrite D. noticeably melodramatic 7) Which is the best antonym for impervious? A. elated B. impenetrable C. invigorated D. vulnerable 8) Which is the best antonym for exacerbate? A. defend B. relegate C. mitigate D. understate

241 Questions (continued): 9) "You are kicking a boy as good as him out the house for a tattoo that says Blessed, no less? " The above sentence has a grammatical error. What is it, and how should it be fixed? A. good should be well B. him should be he C. 'Blessed' should be "Blessed" D. less should be lest 10) Using the passage as a guide, which is the best interpretation of the idiom, cut off your nose to spite your face? A. calling something bad that is not B. trying to teach something too difficult C. loving a person less for what he has done D. pursuing revenge and hurting yourself in the process 11) "Justin was surprisingly contrite." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. Justin was surprisingly relaxed. B. Justin was surprisingly remorseful. C. Justin had surprisingly lost his bad attitude. D. Justin had surprisingly become somber. Have you ever done anything rebellious? Explain.

242 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The 20 Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. It is Levi s birthday. He has a party at home with his family. Everyone sings, Happy Birthday! Levi has nine candles on his cake. He blows them out. He opens his presents. Levi s mother and father give him a bicycle. Levi s little sister gives him a game. Levi s uncle gives him a baseball jersey. Levi s grandma and grandpa give him 20 dollars! "Thank you!" he yells to everyone. Levi is excited. He likes all his presents. He likes the 20 dollars best. It means he can go to the store. He can buy anything he wants! Can we go to the store now, Mom? asks Levi. Mom frowns. Levi, your guests are still here. I will take you to the store tomorrow. That night, Levi dreams of all the things he might buy with his 20 dollars. Maybe I will buy a video game! Maybe I will buy a guitar! Maybe I will buy a camera! Maybe I will buy a tool kit! In the morning, Mom takes Levi and his little sister to the store. Will you buy me something, too? asks Levi s little sister. Maybe, Levi says. He runs to look around the store. Ugh! The guitar costs more than 20 dollars. The video game costs more than 20 dollars. The camera costs more than 20 dollars. The tool kit costs 12 dollars. Levi buys the tool kit. He buys his little sister a key chain. He buys his mom a pack of gum. You are a sweet boy, Levi s mom tells him.

243 Questions: 1) Who is at Levi's party? Check all that are correct. A. his friends B. his parents C. his teachers D. his uncle 2) How old is Levi? A. 3) What does Levi's sister give him? A. a baseball jersey B. a bike C. a game D. money 4) How does Levi feel about his presents? Check all that are correct. A. He likes all of them. B. He likes the bike best. C. He likes the money best. D. He likes the game least. 5) What is one of the things Levi dreams of buying? A. a bike B. a camera C. a key chain D. a baseball jersey 6) Why does Levi's mom frown at him? A. Levi is mean to his sister. B. Levi asks for more money. C. Levi does not thank everyone for his gifts. D. Levi wants to go to the store during the party. 7) When does Levi go to the store? A. 8) What doesn't Levi know? A. that the store is closed B. that his baseball jersey is too big C. that most things he wants cost more than 20 dollars D. that his sister has more money than he does

244 Questions (continued): 9) Who goes with Levi to the store? Check all that are correct. A. his grandma B. his mom C. his sister D. his uncle 10) What does Levi buy for himself? A. 11) How much money does Levi have left after buying the tool kit? A. $20 plus $12 B. $20 minus $12 C. $20 times $12 D. $20 divided by $12 12) Why does Levi's mom call him a sweet boy? A. because it is his birthday B. because he eats a lot of candy on his birthday C. because he waits until the next day to go to the store D. because he buys something for his mom and little sister If you had twenty dollars, what would you buy with it? Why?

245 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Blow Dryer Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. A blow dryer is a common household appliance. Have you ever wondered how a blow dryer works? A small fan inside the dryer spins when you turn it on. The fan sucks air into the dryer from the back. The air warms up as it passes across heated coils inside the blow-dryer. The warm air blows out the front of the dryer and dries your hair. This is much faster than using a towel to dry your hair. Questions: 1) What is this passage mainly about? A. how blow dryers work B. why blow dryers are safe C. why you should not towel dry your hair 3) According to the passage, what does the fan on a blow dryer do? A. heats the coils B. sucks air into the dryer C. keeps the dryer cool 2) What does spin mean? A. to move up and down B. to make a loud noise C. to turn around quickly 4) What does suck mean? A. to push B. to blow out C. to draw in 5) What does this passage suggest about blow dryers? A. They are safe. B. They save time. C. They cost a lot of money.

246 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The brain is a part of your body. It is inside your head. You use your brain to think. The Brain Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The brain makes your fingers, eyes, ears, arms and legs work. You need your brain! Questions: 1) Where is your brain? A. in your legs B. in your head C. in your toes 2) How do you think? A. with your eyes B. with your brain C. with your toes 3) The brain makes your and work. Check two that are correct. A. arms B. trees C. legs D. flowers E. machines Is the brain important? Why?

247 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Brenners Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The Brenner family has a mom, a dad, three boys, two dogs, a hamster and four frogs. They are very happy. Their house is very small. Mom and Dad share one bedroom. The three boys share one bedroom. Their names are Billy, Bobby and Brad. All the pets sleep in the living room. Mr. and Mrs. Brenner came home today from the doctor with news. It is very big news. There are going to be two more of us, Mrs. Brenner says with a smile. I am pregnant. Billy, Bobby and Brad cheer. We will have a basketball team, Billy says. And do you know what Dad and I have decided we need? asks Mrs. Brenner? A coach? asks Bobby. No, Mr. Brenner says with a laugh, A bigger house. Over the next week, the Brenner family starts looking for a new house. On Monday, they see a brick house with a big front porch. It has three bedrooms. Mr. Brenner likes this one. On Thursday, they see a wooden house with a big backyard. It has four bedrooms. Mrs. Brenner thinks this house is great. On Saturday, they see a house with four bedrooms and a pool. The boys like this house a lot. They dream of having their friends over for a swim. But it s smaller than the house we live in now! Mrs. Brenner says. All of the houses cost a lot of money. I think we need to save more money before we buy a bigger house, says Mr. Brenner. Mrs. Brenner agrees. Soon, two new babies arrive in their very small house. Their names are Beth and Brooke. The two baby girls sleep in a crib by their parent s bed. Mr. Brenner buys a basketball hoop and puts it in the driveway.

248 Questions: 1) What is the Brenner house like? Check all that are correct. A. crowded B. dirty C. small D. empty 2) Who shares a bedroom? A. Dad and Bobby B. everyone C. Mom, Dad and Brad D. Billy, Bobby, and Brad 3) What pets do the Brenners have? Check all that are correct. A. three dogs B. a hamster C. four frogs D. a cat 4) How many dogs do the Brenners have? A. 5) What can be said about all the kids' names? A. They are all boy names. B. They all start with the letter "B." C. They are all long. D. They all end in "Y." 6) What is the big news? A. Mrs. Brenner is pregnant with twins. B. The Brenners are moving to a new house. C. The Brenners are starting a basketball team. D. The Brenners are getting some new pets. 7) Why does Bobby say the Brenners need a coach? A. because Mr. Brenner is too busy to coach B. because they need help buying a house C. because they will soon have enough kids for a basketball team D. because Mrs. Brenner will not be able to coach while she is pregnant 8) Which house does Mr. Brenner like? A. the one with a pool B. the one with a big backyard C. the one with a big front porch D. the one with four bedrooms

249 Questions (continued): 9) What house does Mrs. Brenner like? Check all that are correct. A. the brick house B. the one with a big backyard C. the one with a big front porch D. the one with four bedrooms 10) Why do the boys like the house with the pool? A. It has the biggest yard. B. It is the biggest house. C. They are on the swim team. D. They want to have their friends over to swim. 11) How are all the houses they see alike? A. They are all very pretty. B. They are all very big. C. They each have four bedrooms. D. They all cost a lot of money. 12) What must Mr. and Mrs. Brenner do before buying a new house? A. get new jobs B. have the babies C. save more money D. move to a new city 13) What does Mr. Brenner put in the driveway? A. How big is your family? Do you like this size? Why or why not?

250 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Dana Miller is a bus driver. The Bus Driver Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. She drives a bus in the city of Philadelphia. She works the night shift. That means she starts work at 10:00 at night and gets off at 6:00 in the morning. Dana has been driving a bus for 15 years. She started when she was 23-yearsold. She loves her job most of the time. She gets to see the beautiful city from her seat. She gets to meet all kinds of people. There is the guitar player. He lugs his heavy guitar on the bus every Friday night. He plays at a night spot downtown. People call him Get Low. That is because he likes to play the guitar on his knees. If the bus is not too crowded, Get Low plays in the back of the bus. The bus is seldom crowded at night. There is the woman who works at the pretzel factory. Each day the Pretzel Lady brings Dana a bag of fresh, soft pretzels. They fill the bus with a wonderful smell! Sometimes Dana s job is hard. It is hard when Dana sees people down on their luck. One time, a young woman left her sleeping baby on the bus. There was a note on the baby's blanket asking for help. Dana had to call the police. Another time, a teenage boy stole money from Dana on the bus. He had a fake gun. Dana thought it was real. She was very scared. Occasionally, driving the bus can be scary. But most of the time, driving the bus is great. Dana does not want to work anywhere else. How was your night? Dana s husband likes to ask when she gets home. Good music, good food and a great view of the city, she says.

251 Questions: 1) Where does Dana drive the bus? A. around Philadelphia B. to the police station C. to pick up guitar players D. to pick up school children 2) What shift does Dana work? A. 3) How old is Dana? A. 15 B. 23 C. 38 D. 39 4) How long is Dana's shift? A. 6 hours B. 8 hours C. 10 hours D. 12 hours 5) What is one reason Dana loves her job? A. She finds sleeping babies. B. She gets to call the police. C. She gets to sleep during the day. D. She gets to meet all kinds of people. 6) Why is the guitar player called Get Low? A. He has a low voice. B. He likes to play sitting down. C. He likes to play on his knees. D. It is the name of his favorite song. 7) What does the word lug mean? A. to throw B. to push easily C. to carry on one's head D. to move something that is hard to move around 9) How often does Get Low play guitar on the bus? Check all that are correct. A. every Friday night B. when the bus is crowded C. most Friday nights D. when the bus is not crowded 8) What night does the guitar player ride the bus? A. 10) Who gives Dana pretzels? A. the guitar player B. the young mom C. the teenager D. the woman who works at the factory

252 Questions: 11) Why might the young woman have left her baby? A. He was cold. B. He was sleeping. C. She forgot the baby. D. She felt she could not take care of him. 12) Who steals money? A. 13) Why does Dana seem to think people do bad things? Check all that are correct. A. They are bad people. B. They want to be bad. C. They are down on their luck. D. Someone told them to be bad. 14) What is the best synonym for occasionally? A. often B. sometimes C. never D. almost always 15) What great view of the city does Dana have? A. from a tall building B. from a mountain top C. from the sidewalk D. from her bus seat Do you think Dana has a good job? Explain.

253 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Butterfly Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The butterfly is a beautiful insect. It has four thin wings. The wings can have many different colors on them. As a butterfly gets older, the colors on its wings fade. Butterflies live all over the world. Most butterflies live where it is very warm and not too dry. Questions: 1) How many wings does a butterfly have? A. 2 B. 4 C. 6 2) According to the passage, what happens to a butterfly as it gets older? A. Its wings fall off. B. It becomes a caterpillar. C. The colors on its wings fade. 3) What does fade mean? A. to lose color B. to get darker C. to change order 4) Where do most butterflies live? A. in hot places B. in cool, dry places C. in warm places that are not too dry 5) What is a butterfly? A. an animal B. an insect C. a mammal

254 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Drive Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Gustavo works far away from his home. He drives a car to work. It takes him 3 hours to get there. Gustavo drives. While he drives, he thinks about many things. He thinks about his little girl. She likes to ride horses. He thinks about his little boy. He plays fireman all the time. He thinks about his wife. She milks the cows on the farm. Gustavo thinks of things he has to do when he gets home. He needs to cut the grass. He needs to water the flowers. He wants to read a story to his little girl. He wants to play a game with his little boy. He wants to sit with his wife. He wants to tell her about his day. Questions: 1) How does Gustavo get to work? A. By bus B. By car C. By horse D. By train 2) What does Gustavo do when he drives? A. He sings. B. He talks. C. He thinks. D. He works.

255 Questions (continued): 3) What does Gustavo think about? Check all that are correct. A. His car. B. His little boy. C. His wife. D. His work. 4) How long does it take Gustavo to get to work? A. 5) What does his little girl like to do? A. Milk cows. B. Play fireman. C. Ride horses. D. Water flowers. 6) What does his little boy like to play? A. 7) What does Gustavo need to do when he gets home? Check all that are correct. A. Read a story. B. Milk the cows. C. Cut the grass. D. Water the flowers. 8) What does Gustavo want to do when he gets home? Check all that are correct. A. Sit with his wife. B. Water the flowers. C. Read to his little girl. D. Play a game with his little boy 9) Why may Gustavo need to cut the grass? A. It is too green. B. It is too brown. C. It is too long. D. It is too short. 10) Why may Gustavo need to water the flowers? A. So they will go. B. So they will give. C. So they will grow. D. So they will guess.

256 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Mini Problem Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Lily s anger could not have been more palpable. She awakened Christmas morning and, along with her brother, ran down to see the gifts under the tree. In the living room sat a magnificent mini bike. It was red with a pearly white gas tank and side panels. For a brief moment, Lily was filled with what seemed like insurmountable excitement. Then, her eyes caught hold of a baby doll sitting on the couch with a huge bow. She knew. She knew that the mini bike belonged to her brother and that she had been relegated to that doll. It was par for the course. Tommy always got cool things: skateboards, gliders, science kits. The mini bike was just the latest cool thing. Lily always got the boring gifts: a doll with a gown, a doll with a tutu, a doll with a puppy. This doll seemed unusually blah. The doll wore a petticoat. The doll had short, straight black hair. Tommy had seen that mini-bike in the front window of Moore s Bike Shop, but hadn t Lily too? Hadn t she asked for it with as much fervor as her twin brother? Tommy s eyes grew wide at the sight of the bike he knew was his no doll for him. He ran into his parent s room and jumped excitedly on the bed. Thank you, Mama! Thank you, Papa, he yelled. Lily seethed in the other room. It took a while for anyone to even realize she was missing. What s wrong, Lil? Papa asked. Did you see your pretty doll? I saw it, she said sulkily. What s wrong? asked Mama. Silence. Oh, Mama, you know Lily is never excited by presents! her brother laughed. Come out and watch me ride! And so they did.

257 Questions: 1) Why was Lily's anger described as palpable? A. It was misplaced. B. It was irrational. C. It was very difficult to understand. D. It was so intense it seemed like it could be touched. 2) Which is the best antonym for insurmountable? A. sane B. phony C. unjustified D. conquerable 3) Which best describes the act of being relegated? A. A star athlete is given a coveted award. B. A disobedient dog is put in the garage to sleep. C. A struggling student is given the worst grade in the class. D. The birthday boy is taken to his favorite restaurant. 4) What does the expression par for the course imply? A. that something is to be expected B. that something cannot be undone C. that something is sure to cause anger D. that something was meant to be hurtful 5) What is ironic about the title of this passage? A. Lily has a big problem. B. Tommy is perfectly happy. C. Lily does not get a mini bike. D. No one realizes there is a problem. 6) What could the author have written if she wanted to show Lily improving her situation? A. a scene with Lily storming out of the house B. a description of Lily getting to ride the mini bike first C. a paragraph describing Lily pretending to appreciate the doll D. a dialogue with Lily explaining to her family why she was so angry

258 Questions (continued): 7) Which is the best antonym for fervor? A. gluttony B. indifference C. politeness D. quiet 8) What might Lily's parents be accused of? Check all that are correct. A. being stingy B. not loving Lily C. being insensitive D. being gender biased 9) In paragraph 6, what is the most like reason the author repeats the word "doll"? A. to highlight how extravagant the dolls were B. to juxtapose the number of dolls with just one mini bike C. to make it clear how monotonous this gift had become for Lily D. to make it clear that the doll she got this Christmas was the worst of all 10) Which is the best antonym for seethed? A. cheered up B. calmed down C. spoke softly D. breathed heavily What would you do if you were in Lily s position? Explain.

259 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The New School Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Tracey is starting a new school today. She is very sad. She is very scared. I don t want to go to school today, Tracey tells her dad. I understand, sweetheart, Dad says. Starting a new school can be very scary. Tracey has moved to a new town. She has moved to a new house. She is starting a new school today. She has done all of this in a week! I feel sick, Tracey says. My stomach hurts. I can t eat breakfast. I think that is because you are nervous, Dad says. He brushes Tracey s hair down. He gives her a little hug. Try drinking just a little juice. Then I will walk you to school. Tracey and her dad walk to school. Tracey thinks about many things. Will I make friends? Will I like my teacher? What if I don t know the answer to a question? Will kids laugh at me? What if no one likes me? We re here, says Dad. Tracey looks up at the big building. Her other school was small. Tracey wishes she could run away. She knows she cannot. She takes a deep breath. She walks up the steps to school. She walks into her third grade classroom. That must be Tracey, she hears a boy say. Hello, Tracey! Welcome, Tracey! Let me show you around.

260 Everyone seems kind. Tracey feels a little better. She is still not happy. She is still a little scared. She cannot eat her lunch. Dad picks Tracey up after school. How was your day? he asks. Okay, she says. It will get better, Dad says. Big changes are hard. I know, says Tracey. She reaches for her dad s hand to hold as they walk home. Questions: 1) Why is Tracey sad and scared? A. She is moving to a new house today. B. She is moving to a new town today. C. She is starting a new school today. D. She is walking to school alone today. 2) What has Tracey done during the week? Check all that are correct. A. made a new friend B. gone to a new church C. moved to a new town D. moved to a new house 3) What grade is Tracey in? A. 4) Why can't Tracey eat breakfast? A. She has no food. B. Her stomach hurts. C. She is late for school. D. She does not like the food. 5) Why does Tracey's dad think she feels sick? A. because she is sleepy B. because she is nervous C. because she has a cold D. because she ate too much 6) In this story, what does nervous mean? A. to be happy B. to be hungry C. to be mad D. to be scared

261 Questions (continued): 7) What does Dad tell Tracey to do before school? A. stop crying B. get her bag C. drink some juice D. put on her shoes 8) How do Tracey and Dad get to school? A. 9) What does Tracey think about most as she walks? A. math B. reading C. having friends D. her teachers 10) When does Tracey seem to be brave? A. when she cannot eat B. when she feels better C. when she holds her dad's hand D. when she walks up the steps to the school 11) What is Tracey's new school like? A. big B. dirty C. loud D. small 12) How do the children in Tracey's class seem? A. kind B. pretty C. funny D. not very nice Have you ever felt nervous about doing something new? Explain.

262 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Ocean Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The ocean is big. The ocean is blue. The ocean has waves. Some waves are small. Some waves are very small. They are tiny! Some waves are big. Some waves are very big. They are huge! In some places, the ocean is very deep. In some places, you cannot see the bottom. Questions: 1) Is the ocean small or big? A. The ocean is small. B. The ocean is big. 2) What color is the ocean? A. blue B. yellow C. brown 3) What is the ocean made of? A. air B. water C. fire 4) What does tiny mean? A. small B. very small C. big D. very big

263 Questions (continued): 5) What does huge mean? A. small B. very small C. big D. very big 6) Why can't you see the bottom of the ocean in some places? A. because the ocean is dirty B. because the ocean is deep C. because the ocean has many waves 7) Which words can we use to describe the ocean? Check three that are correct. A. big B. blue C. happy D. tiny E. deep Do you like the ocean? What do you like about it? What don t you like about it?

264 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Park Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Reem likes to go to the park with her mom. She likes to play at the park with her friends. Today when Reem goes to the park, she looks around and becomes very sad. What is wrong, Reem? Mom asks. There is so much trash on the ground, Reem says. It seems like each day, I see more trash here. Reem and her mom look around. There are old boxes on the ground. There are popped balloons on the ground. There are old cans, too. You are right, Mom says. The park is very dirty. What can we do? Reem asks. I am sure you will think of something, Mom says. Reem and her mom go home. Reem paints a picture of a park. She uses blue, green, brown and yellow paint. PLEASE KEEP OUR PARK CLEAN, she writes in big letters on top of her picture. Let s go back to the park, Mom, Reem says. Okay, Mom says. Reem grabs a bunch of trash bags to take with her. She also brings along some tape. When Reem gets to the park, she tapes her picture on a big trashcan.

265 Here you go! she says to her mom. She hands Mom a bag. Will you help me pick up the trash? I sure will, Mom says. The children at the park run over to see what is going on. Reem hands them bags. Let s clean this place up, she says. The children pick up lots of trash. They talk and laugh as they work. Soon all the bags are full. We need to come back another day. There is still some trash on the ground, Reem says. But the park looks much better. It does, Mom says. I knew you would think of some way to help. Questions: 1) Why is Reem sad? A. her friends are not at the park B. she cannot find her mom C. there is a lot of trash at the park D. she hurts herself on the slide 2) What is on the ground? Check all that are correct. A. old cans B. old boxes C. old food D. old shoes 3) What does Reem do when she gets home? A. 4) Where does Reem put her picture? A. 5) Why does Reem tape her picture to the trashcan? A. so people can see it B. so it falls to the ground C. so people get mad D. She is tired of holding it 6) Who helps Reem pick up trash? Check all that are correct. A. her dad B. her mom C. no one D. other children

266 Questions (continued): 7) What does Reem give the children? A. brooms B. gifts C. mops D. trash bags 8) What does Reem learn at the park? A. that she can help make things better B. that people do not care about the park C. that her mom does not like to pick up trash D. that the park has no trashcans 9) How might Reem and her friends feel after cleaning up? A. funny B. good C. mad D. sad 10) How does the park look after everyone cleans it up? A. all clean B. better C. very dirty D. more dirty 11) Why does Reem say that she will come back another day? A. to play at the park B. to clean up more trash C. to empty the trash bags D. to show her dad her work Can you think of other ways to fight pollution and preserve the environment?

267 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Rent Man Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Someone is knocking on Amanda s door. Amanda is home, but she does not answer. It is the man who owns the house where she lives. His name is Mr. Campbell. Amanda calls him the Rent Man. He has come by to get the rent money Amanda owes. Amanda does not have the money to pay him. Amanda lost her job at the auto factory three weeks ago. I worked there for 15 years, Amanda thinks to herself. She is bitter. But it took them just one day to take my job away. Amanda has no idea when she will find another job. Lots of other people from her factory lost their jobs three weeks ago too. She looks for work every day. She looks for work at a restaurant. You have never worked at a restaurant, the owner tells her. This job is not for you. She looks for work at the bookstore. We don t have any jobs right now, the clerk tells Amanda. She looks for work at the grocery store. I will call you to let you know, the manager says. Amanda is worried. She is running out of money quickly. There is another loud knock at the door. Amanda sits quietly in her kitchen. She hopes the Rent Man will go away soon.

268 Questions: 1) Who is knocking at Amanda's door? A. the restaurant owner B. the clerk C. Mr. Campbell D. the manager 2) What does Mr. Campbell want? A. a book B. a car C. a job D. money 3) Why doesn't Amanda answer the door? A. She is sick. B. She is not home. C. She has no money. D. She doesn't hear it. 4) When did Amanda lose her job? A. 5) If Amanda is bitter, how does she feel? A. hateful and angry B. happy and sure C. hungry and tired D. quiet and alone 6) What seems to be the reason Amanda lost her job at the factory? A. She was bitter. B. She was a bad worker. C. She had worked there too long. D. Business was slow. 7) Where does Amanda look for a new job? Check all that are correct. A. a restaurant B. another factory C. a bookstore D. a grocery store 8) Which job might Amanda get? A. none of them B. the restaurant job C. the bookstore job D. the grocery store job

269 Questions (continued): 9) Where is Amanda? A. 10) What helpful thing could Amanda have said if she had opened the door? A. She could have told Mr. Campbell that she lost her job. B. She could have told Mr. Campbell to go away. C. She could have told Mr. Campbell to stop knocking. D. She could have told Mr. Campbell she was bitter. 11) What might Mr. Campbell do next? Check all that are correct. A. knock the door down B. come back another day C. offer Amanda a job D. call Amanda on the phone 12) Why does Amanda sit quietly? A. so she can think B. so she can hear the door C. so Mr. Campbell will not know she is home D. because Mr. Campbell told her to Is Mr. Campbell a bad man? Why or why not?

270 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 My name is Uma. The Runaway Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I was 17 when I ran away from home for good. I stole $45 from my Dad s drawer one morning. He had already left for work. I stuffed some clothes in my backpack. I headed for the bus station. I caught the first bus that came in. It did not matter to me where I was going. It just mattered that I was leaving. I ended up in Springfield, Massachusetts. I got here around sunset. My first night here, I was scared. I was alone. I slept behind an old store so no one would see me. It was December. I was so cold. Today, I am still in Springfield. I am 28-years-old. I have a kid who is 11. I wait tables at a restaurant. The food is not so good. The people who eat there are not so nice. I think about my dad sometimes. Do I have a grandma? my kid asks. No, I say. Do I have a grandpa? he asks. Not to speak of, I say. That is when I think of my dad. I think about what he is doing. I think about if he misses me or not. I don t miss him much at all. But it s nice to feel like someone misses you.

271 Questions: 1) What does for good mean in this story? A. forever B. for a little while C. to have a good time D. to make things better 2) How old was Uma when she ran away? A. 11 B. 16 C. 17 D. 28 3) Where did Uma get $45? A. She stole it. B. She borrowed it. C. She worked for it. D. She got it from her drawer. 4) How did Uma run away? A. she walked B. she drove C. she caught the bus D. she caught the train 5) Why might Uma not have cared where the bus was going? A. She was very tired. B. She wanted to get away fast. C. Her friends were on the bus. D. She did not want to catch the train. 6) What kind of person does Uma seem to be? A. honest B. funny C. pretty D. sad 7) Why did Uma sleep behind the store? A. so she could buy food B. so no one would see her C. there were other people there D. her friends asked her to 8) In what month did Uma run away? A. 9) Where does Uma work? A. at a school B. at a restaurant C. at a bakery D. at a store 10) When does Uma think about her Dad? A. all the time B. every December C. when her child asks about grandpa D. when she works at the restaurant

272 Questions (continued): 11) What does Uma say about herself in the story? Check all that are correct. A. She is a runaway. B. She is sad. C. She lives in Springfield, Massachusetts. D. She wants a new job. 12) Given what you know about the story, what will Uma probably do next? A. find her dad B. go back home C. kiss her child D. see a movie with her husband 13) Why does Uma run away from home? A. because her dad abuses her B. because she is scared C. because she stole money from her dad D. The story does not say why. Is it ever a good idea to run away? Explain.

273 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The Storm Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Crack-crack kowowww! Thunder, and a shock of lightening etched its reflection upon the corrugated metal siding, Rowan read aloud. She worked to read clearly, with depth and emotion. Her eyes scanned the page to the next paragraph. She took a breath to continue, but was interrupted by her younger brother Nolan, stretched out on the living room couch, flicking a pencil against his forehead. I was never a big fan of onomatopoeia, Nolan said, in his usual, supercilious, manner. It is impossible to write words that truly sound like a thunderstorm, a jar opening or a falling tree, yes? But, do continue. Rowan sucked her teeth. That s why I can t stand doing this in front of you, Nolli. You are no help at all. Haven t you something better to do? Ha! Better than to annoy you before your moment of reckoning? I don t think so. Rowan s enjoyment of getting under his big sister s skin was fully conspicuous. Nolli, please keep quiet! Mother broke in. This is important. Rowan presents in less than an hour. She needs to focus. Row, sweetheart, please continue. Mother s comments seemed to assuage Rowan s irritation. She cleared her throat and continued where she had left off. Farmer John knew this was a storm of epic proportion. Even the cows retreated to their hutches. Not one person in the The cows retreated? The cows retreated? Nolan chortled upon hearing the repetition of this line in his own voice. That s great. Even the stupid cows retreated! Oh, man. That must have been one heck of a storm-a-brewin. Mama, I m scared! Nolan howled at the ceiling and curled up into a tight little ball of laughter. Nolli! Mother Ann turned and shouted. The loudness of her voice was tantamount to the rumbling storm Rowan was trying to capture in her reading. Mother began laying into the boy, castigating him most thoroughly about his rudeness and lack of respect for Rowan s preparations. After her outburst, Mother sighed rather contentedly; she felt as though she had achieved the intended effect. Sometimes she even surprised herself at the fury by which, if completely necessary, she could quell any quarrel.

274 Nolan had fallen silent. He actually appeared remorseful. Oh, Mother. Rowan sighed, crumpling to the floor, despondent. It s no use. The Storm shall be the end of me Ahh, but Rowan, my dear, Mother rejoined, this is but a mere shower! Questions: 1) Given what Nolan says in the passage, which best describes onomatopoeia? A. a story that is told orally B. the vocal imitation of a sound C. repetition of the initial letter sound D. the repetition of similar vowel sounds 2) Why does Rowan get upset with Nolan? Check all that are correct. A. because he is being obnoxious B. because he interrupts her reading C. because he dislikes onomatopoeia D. because he is stretched out on the couch 3) What does it mean to be supercilious? A. to be haughty B. to be comical C. to be gifted with words D. to be young and smart 4) What does the reader learn through Rowan's actions? A. He does not like his sister. B. He enjoys being annoying. C. He wants to give a reading himself. D. He has heard the passage before.

275 Questions (continued): 5) What might Nolan be referring to when he talks about Rowan's "moment of reckoning"? A. the end of her life B. an upcoming presentation C. a time when Mother will yell at Rowan D. a time when Nolan will annoy Rowan even more 6) Rewrite the following sentence: Mother s comments seemed to assuage Rowan s irritation. A. Mother's comments make Rowan feel worse. B. Mother's comments do nothing to help Rowan. C. Mother's comments help to ease Rowan's irritation. D. Mother's comments prove that Rowan is rightfully irritated. 7) What seems to cause Nolan to feel remorseful? A. His mother scolding him. B. Rowan falling to the floor. C. He thinks about how he would feel. D. His sister's nervousness about her presentation. 8) Why might Rowan feel despondent? A. She is totally angry with her brother. B. She feels her mother is babying her. C. She feels practicing is hopeless. D. She is ready to leave for the presentation. 9) What might Mother mean when she tells Rowan, "This is but a mere shower."? A. It has started to rain outside. B. The piece Rowan is to read is juvenile. C. Mother's anger with Nolan was just for show. D. This is nothing compared to what Rowan will go through later.

276 Questions (continued): 10) If X is tantamount to Y, what is their relationship? A. X is greater than Y. B. X is less than Y. C. X equals Y. D. X and Y have no connection. 11) If Mother is castigating Nolan, what is she doing? A. yelling at him B. spanking him C. threatening him D. criticizing his actions 12) When is Rowan to present? A. Who is your favorite character in this story? Why?

277 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 The sun is in the sky. It is yellow. It is a star. The Sun Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The sun gives the earth light and heat. It helps plants grow. Questions: 1) What color is the sun? A. green B. white C. yellow 2) Where is the sun? A. in the sky B. in the earth C. near the plants 3) How would the earth be with no sun? A. light and cold B. hot and dark C. dark and cold Is the sun good? Why?

278 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Time with Grandpa Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Ben jumped from bed as soon as the first bit of sun peeped through his window. He grabbed his backpack from his closet and opened it on the floor. Ben put in some of his favorite things to take with him on his trip to visit Grandpa. He put in a book on building forts, a book on making go-carts and a new book he had gotten from the library about a kid detective who creates his own spy gear. He also put in a model car kit and his stuffed bear. He was ready to go! Going to visit his grandfather for a week by himself was always Ben s favorite part of summer vacation. Grandpa would take him fishing and to baseball games. Grandpa also taught Ben how to fix things around the house. Last year, when he was eight-years-old, Ben had learned how to replace a broken doorknob and how to fix a leaky faucet. Grandpa was patient and did not mind taking many hours to show Ben how to use his tools. Ben s mom stuck her head in his bedroom door. Grandpa s here, she said with a smile. Ben grabbed his backpack and ran into the kitchen where Grandpa was waiting. Ready, big guy? asked Grandpa. Or do you want to eat breakfast before we leave? Ready, said Ben. As he kissed his mother goodbye, he felt his stomach rumble. We can eat later! Questions: 1) What is the most likely reason Ben jumps out of bed? A. He is late. B. He is scared. C. He is excited. D. He is worried. 2) How old is Ben? A.

279 Questions: 3) What time of year is it? A. 4) What is Ben s favorite part of summer vacation? A. fixing stuff B. going fishing C. visiting his grandfather D. going to a baseball game 5) In the fourth paragraph, what is the meaning of the word patient? A. very slow B. sick in the hospital C. good about sharing D. taking time without complaint 6) Judging by the things Ben put in his backpack, what does he like to do most? A. make things B. ride go-carts C. spy on people D. read big books 7) Where and when does this story take place? A. at Grandpa s house in the early afternoon B. at Ben s house in the early afternoon C. at Grandpa s house in the morning D. at Ben s house in the morning 8) According to the story, what is one of the things Ben s Grandpa taught him to do? A. use a drill B. build a fort C. fix a leaky faucet D. build a model car 9) What is the most likely reason Ben did not eat breakfast? A. He was not hungry. B. He did not like his mother s cooking. C. He wanted to leave for his grandpa's house. D. He had already eaten.

280 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Tracks Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Lida sat outside her great Aunt s hotel, watching the steam engines go by and listening to the clop-clop of horses as they pulled wagons down the cobbled road. She was taking a short break from tending to all her chores at the inn: mopping the ballroom, fixing the cornbread for guests, and tending the fire in the wood burning stove. Lida had an assiduous nature and always strove to make sure her tasks were done properly and without waste of time. However, today she took a quick respite to daydream about the party she would be going to that evening. At 17, it would be her first. Her friends had all picked out brightly colored dresses to wear. Lida, being extremely demure, chose a simple, but pretty, dress in a charcoal gray. Are you ready, Miss Lida? Hattie asked as she burst in through the parlor doors and into the kitchen. Mary and Florence were in step right behind her. Hattie, I done told you never to come in that way. You disturb the guests having cocktails in the parlor! Oh hush, Lida. You worry too much. Let s go. I need to put a few more logs in the stove so Auntie can boil water for the dishes, Lida said. Then we can go. Hattie gave a sigh, but did not bother to argue. She knew when Lida had something to do, she didn t rest until it was done. Let s take the tracks, Hattie said when they finally headed out to the party. Daylight was turning into dusk. Naw, Hattie, Lida said. "You know that s too dangerous in the night. Look, Lida, Hattie said tersely. We re runnin late cause of you. The tracks will take 15 minutes off our walk. Mary and Florence mumbled in agreement. Against her better judgment, Lida agreed to take the train tracks. It was her first party ever. Why deal with acrimony and ill feelings?

281 The girls slowly navigated tracks in the dark and talked excitedly about the dance. Lida heard a whistle in the distance. We ve gotta get off the track. Train s coming. The girls quickly scurried off the side. In the dark, Lida heard a thud and a gasp. Help! screamed Hattie. She had fallen in the ash pit, a 6 foot trench about 20 feet long between the rails where trains stopped to empty ashes from engine s fire box when they pulled through town. Hattie screamed and tried frantically to climb out, but she was too short to grab hold to the top of the pit. The train was getting closer, the whistle more piercing. Not wanting to appear scared herself, Lida dissembled and refused to let her voice show panic. Just give me your hand, Hattie, and I ll pull ya right out. They fumbled for each others hands in the dark. Lida lay down on the rails and hooked her feet under the track to give herself some leverage. She pulled and pulled while Mary and Florence screamed in the dark. One final pull got Hattie out the pit. They ran off the edge of track to safety as the train pulled to a stop and dropped its load of torrid ashes. Questions: 1) Which idea can best be supported by what is said in this passage? A. Lida lives in a big house. B. Lida and her family are poor. C. Lida and Hattie are best friends. D. Lida is treated poorly at the hotel. E. This story takes place a long time ago. 2) What is the most likely reason the author included the following paragraph? "Hattie gave a sigh, but did not bother to argue. She knew when Lida had something to do, she didn t rest until it was done." A. to set the reader up for Lida's heroic efforts B. to explain why the girls would be late to the party C. to let the reader know how mature Lida was D. to let the reader know how much Lida and Hattie argue

282 Questions (continued): 3) What is the best definiton of assiduous? A. careful B. efficient C. energetic D. hardworking E. non complaining 4) Which is the best antonym for respite? A. continuation B. directness C. erect stance D. morning break E. afternoon nap 5) Using the passage as a guide, how do Hattie and Lida differ? A. Hattie is good-natured; Lida is stoic. B. Hattie is trusting; Lida is circumspect. C. Hattie is carefree; Lida is responsible. D. Hattie is respectful; Lida is judgmental. E. Hattie is excited about the party; Lida is ambivalent about it. 6) What type of characters are Mary and Florence? A. round, characterized by being well-developed in the story B. foils, characterized by bringing out each other's traits through contrast C. confidantes, characterized by being people the main character confides in D. flat, characterized as doing very little to advance plot E. dynamic, characterized by changing during the passage 7) What conflicts are illustrated in this passage? Check two that are correct. A. character versus character B. character versus nature C. character versus machine D. character versus destiny E. character versus society 8) What is the best definition of demure? A. boring B. innocent C. innocuous D. reserved E. self-conscious

283 Questions (continued): 9) Which is the best antonym for acrimony? A. agreement B. bad judgment C. happiness D. positive attitude E. timeliness 10) If the ashes were torrid, which best describes what they would they have done to Hattie? A. poisoned her B. suffocated her C. burned her badly D. gotten her all dirty E. weighed her down 11) Why did Lida feel the need to dissemble her panic? A. so that she could gather her strength B. so that she would not fall into the pit herself C. so that she could appear calm for Hattie D. so that she could hear how close the train was E. so that she could come up with an idea to save her friend Have you ever needed a hand? Explain.

284 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Trees have three parts. Trees Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. The roots pull up water and food for the tree from under the ground. The trunk is the stem of the tree. It has bark on it. It helps food get to the branches. The crown is at the top of the tree. Branches, leaves, seeds and flowers are all part of the crown. Questions: 1) What is this passage about? A. what trees eat B. how trees grow C. the parts of a tree 2) What part of the tree is underground? A. the crown B. the roots C. the trunk 3) If a tree has no roots, what happens? A. It cannot eat. B. It can grow fast. C. It has more branches. 4) What are the three main parts of a tree? A. water, food, and seeds B. roots, trunk, and crown C. branches, leaves, and bark Do you like trees? What is your favorite kind of tree? Why?

285 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Ursula Pugh Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Ursula Pugh was at an earlier time in her life before injuries, before a disastrous marriage, before the death of her beloved sister a glorious dancer. Now, she was regarded by many as an angry has-been and horrible teacher. I was not cognizant of these details as I made my way through the doors of The Ursula Children s Theater with my three rambunctious boys in tow. And had I had such information it would not have biased my decision in the least. I was looking for a safe haven in the neighborhood for the boys to hang out after school until I got off work. Staying at home by themselves was not an option. They definitely needed adult supervision if I expected my home to still be standing when I got home from work. The children s theater, much to my boys chagrin, was more convenient for me to get to than the karate studio. No Mama, we want karate, the boys had implored pitifully. I m glad I wasn t swayed though I would not realize until much later what a fortuitous decision this was. Ms. Pugh looked up over her glasses as we arrived at the studio. Boys! she exclaimed before I could even introduce myself. Wonderful. It turned out that Ms. Pugh s program was woefully short of boys and mine were immediately thrown into every production possible at the theater. The rumors were right, in some respects. Ms. Pugh could be brusque and rude with her charges and did not tolerate any signs that a student was not fully dedicated to the program. My boys flourished in this environment. My wild, rough boys, who were often so rude that they embarrassed me in public, gradually became a different species. They will certainly never be world class dancers, but Ms. Pugh s strict ways taught them to be respectful and on time. Moreover, it taught them to follow directions and always strive to do their best.

286 Questions: 1) Which idea can be supported from the first paragraph? A. Ms. Pugh is a bitter woman. B. Ms. Pugh is an old woman. C. Ms. Pugh has been through a lot. D. Ms. Pugh was a world class ballerina. E. Ms. Pugh has become a dance teacher. 2) Which is the best antonym for cognizant? A. aware B. forgetful C. ignorant D. mindful E. resentful 3) What does the term safe haven imply? A. a refuge B. a theater program C. a religious building D. a healthy alternative E. an inexpensive activity 4) Which is the best antonym for chagrin? A. ambivalence B. calm C. confusion D. delight E. ignorance 5) Which is the best antonym for biased? A. awkward B. impartial C. concerned D. attentive E. determined 6) Why was the narrator's decision fortuitous? A. The children's theater was close to her home. B. Her sons learned many valuable life lessons. C. She expected her sons to become good dancers. D. She got to see Ms. Pugh's bad temper first hand. E. There were not many boys in the program for her sons to get in trouble with.

287 Questions (continued): 7) Which best describes the literary technique used in the following sentence. "My wild, rough boys, who were often so rude they embarrassed me in public, gradually became a different species." A. literal, meaning it is to be understood exactly as it is written B. figurative, meaning not intended to be interpreted in its literal sense C. foreshadowing, meaning it offers hints and clues of what is to come D. inversion, meaning a reversal of the usual order of words for emphasis E. symbolism, meaning a person that has meaning in itself also stands for something larger 8) What is the main conflict in this passage? A. man verses man B. man verses himself C. man verses society D. man verses machine E. man verses nature Would you enjoy being a part of Ms. Pugh s theater class? Why or why not?

288 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Vet Emergency! Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. It is 10:00 on a Saturday night. The doors to the animal emergency room fly open. Cyrus carries a tiny black lab puppy into the building. "Save him. Please!" the man cries. "He ran out into the street and got hit by a car." The puppy is whining. There is a lot of blood. Dr. Williams comes from behind the desk. She reads the puppy s name tag. Here, let me take Lobo from you, Dr. Williams tells Cyrus gently. I will take him in the back for x-rays and see what needs to be done. When Dr. Williams gets to the back, she takes a closer look at Lobo. Her face looks grim. She can see the dog's leg is broken badly. She fears there is other damage she cannot see. The assistants in the room are silent. Everyone knows that Lobo may not survive. If he does survive, his leg injury may be so severe that walking will be hard for him to do. The x-rays show that Lobo s front leg has been broken in three places. He is also bleeding inside. Dr. Williams gets to work. She knows she must stop the bleeding quickly. The surgery takes two hours. Dr. Williams fixes the damage to Lobo's leg. She stops the bleeding inside his chest. I will go tell Lobo s owner that this little pup is going to make it, Dr. Williams says. We ll see in a few weeks how well he will walk again. Questions: 1) Where does this story take place? A. in a police station B. in a waiting room C. in a doctor's office D. in an animal hospital 2) What does the mood in the room seem to be? A. angry B. joyful C. relaxed D. tense

289 Questions (continued): 3) When does Dr. Williams know just how badly Lobo has been hurt? A. when Cyrus asks for help B. when she takes a closer look C. when she sees Lobo is a lab puppy D. when the doors to the emergency room fly open 4) Around what time did Lobo's surgery end? A. 10:00 at night B. 10:00 in the morning C. noon D. midnight 5) Which is the best antonym for grim? A. calm B. serious C. hopeful D. beautiful 6) How long is Lobo in surgery? A. 7) What kind of doctor is Dr. Williams? A. a pediatrician B. a dentist C. an internist D. a veterinarian 8) What does it mean to have a severe injury? A. to have a mild injury B. to not be able to run C. to not be able to walk D. to have a very bad injury 9) In how many places was Lobo's leg broken? A. 10) What does the reader know about Lobo by the end of the story? Check all that are correct. A. He will survive. B. He will walk fine. C. He is a black lab. D. He got hit by a car.

290 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Wanga Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I, Nancy Norris, believer of nothing, order my spell kit on the Internet. I feel pretty silly, but I have run out of more sane ideas. I have looked in the want ads. I have sent my resume to a million companies. I have gone to businesses up and down my block asking for work. I need a job. I need money. I need these things fast. I am desperate. I am about to lose my house. I am about to lose my car. I have been out of work for 8 months. The Internet is free at the library. This is a very good thing. I see a site that sells witch doctor spell kits. WARNING: Do not ask for something unless you truly want it to come true! There are Love Kits. These get someone to love you back. There are New Life Kits. These make you happy. There are Money Kits. These bring you money, riches and an easy life. Of course, I choose the Money Kit. This is what I need. I truly want it to come true. I have $20 left on my credit card. I use it all to order my spell kit. Don t laugh. The kit arrives in three days, as promised. I hope the spell works more quickly. Inside the kit is a wanga doll. The doll has been blessed by an actual witch doctor and is a very important part of making my spell come true. That is what the box says, anyway. Wanga is about 6 inches tall. It has bushy black hair. It is dressed in a furry outfit that looks like a bathrobe. Hopefully, he will be my new best friend. There are three different powders in the kit. Each has its own separate bag. The kit also comes with a set of detailed instructions. I am to follow them exactly. I spread the powders out on the floor and place my wanga doll next to them. I hope for the best. My mortgage is due tomorrow.

291 Questions: 1) What is the meaning of the word sane? A. something that is foolish B. something that is powerful C. something that makes sense D. something that makes money 2) Why does Nancy order a spell kit? Check all that are correct. A. She needs a job. B. She needs money. C. She wants a boyfriend. D. She wants to be a witch. 3) Given what is said in the passage, what is another way to write the following sentence? I am desperate. A. I am crazy. B. I full of hope. C. I am willing to try anything. D. I am not sure about anything anymore. 4) What can be said about Nancy from this passage? A. She is well read. B. She is very serious. C. She was once very wealthy. D. She can make fun of herself. 5) What does it mean for something to come true? A. It happens. B. It tells the truth. C. It brings money. D. It is a fairy tale. 6) Which kit does Nancy order? A. 7) What does the wanga doll look like? Check all that are correct. A. It is black. B. It is 6 inches tall. C. It has bushy hair. D. It has on a furry outfit. 8) Which sentence from the story is most likely an exaggeration? A. I need a job. B. Wanga is about 6 inches tall. C. The kit arrives in three days, as promised. D. I have sent my resume to a million companies.

292 Questions (continued): 9) According to the story, why would a person buy the New Life Kit? A. to have a baby B. to become happy C. to move to a new town D. to be cured from sickness 10) What is special about the wanga doll? A. It is full of money. B. It has bushy black hair. C. It is Nancy s best friend. D. It has been blessed by a witch doctor. 11) How long does it take for the kit to arrive? A. 12) What would be the opposite of detailed instructions? A. many instructions B. basic instructions C. specific instructions D. funny instructions 13) How does Nancy pay for her spell kit? A. with cash B. with a check C. with a credit card D. with a money order Are you superstitious? Why or why not?

293 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 What Number? Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Becca and Kai played together all day. The two friends played outside in the morning. They rode bikes and scooters. They ate lunch on the porch. Becca s mom made sandwiches and lemonade. They played hide and seek in the house right after lunch. Then they did not know what to do. I know! Let s play the number game, said Becca. What number am I thinking of? Is it five? asked Kai. No, it is higher than five, Becca said. Okay, is it one hundred? No, it is lower than one hundred, Becca said. Let s see, said Kai. Is it sixty? Becca gave Kai a hint. It is between twenty and thirty. Hmm, is it twenty-five? No, but you are very close! Becca said. Well, is it higher or lower than twenty-five? It is lower, Becca said. Okay, I think I know. Is it twenty-two? Yeah! You guessed it. Becca said. Good job! Questions: 1) Where did Becca and Kai play today? A. They played at school. B. They played at the park. C. They played at Kai's house. D. They played at Becca's house. 2) What did Becca and Kai do in the morning? Check all that are correct. A. rode bikes B. rode scooters C. played outside D. played hide and seek

294 Questions (continued): 3) Where did Becca and Kai eat lunch? A. 4) Whose idea was it to play the number game? A. It was Kai s idea. B. It was Mom s idea. C. It was Becca s idea. D. It was Kai and Becca s idea. 5) What was Kai s second guess? A. five B. twenty-two C. sixty D. one hundred 6) What is another way to write the number sixty? A. 6 B. 16 C. 60 D. 66 7) Which sentence is correct? A. 178 is lower than 177. B. 178 is higher than 177. C. 178 is between 177. D. 178 is the same as ) Check all that are correct. A. 224 is lower than 256. B. 224 is higher than 256. C. 224 is between 220 and 230. D. 224 is between 220 and ) Why was Kai's guess of twentyfive close? A. Twenty-five is a big number. B. It is near the number Becca was thinking about. C. It is far away from the number Becca was thinking. D. Twenty-five is lower than the number Becca was thinking. 10) What does it mean to give someone a hint? A. to give someone a clue B. to make a question hard C. to tell someone to give up D. to give someone the answer 11) What number was Becca thinking about? A. 12) What other number could Becca have been thinking about? A. ten B. fifteen C. twenty-three D. twenty-eight

295 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Wild Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. I was 16 when my father unequivocally decided that he would send me to wilderness camp for several months. He had threatened many times before, but my mother had always managed to persuade him from actually packing me up and shipping me off. My latest transgression was viewed as the last straw. In a fit of unbridled rage, I had shoved my math teacher down a flight of steps at school. He broke his arm in two places and severely dislocated his shoulder. The man hadn t done a thing to me. I am hard pressed to remember why I was so irritated at him. Anyway, Mr. Ford, my math teacher, had agreed not to press charges as favor to my dad. He was a friend of my dad s from way back. Mr. Ford knew what was at stake. We all did. Dad was in the middle of a tight race for sheriff in our town. This latest Danny Thing, as all of my reckless behavior was now called, had all my dad s closest advisors talking. John, he s your son and he s a kid, but he is dragging you down, I heard Jake Hutch tell my dad through his closed office door the night after I pushed Mr. Ford. If it appears you can t set the course for enforcement in your own home, how can you set the course for this town? So, off to the Pisgah National Forest I went. I knew in my heart that Wilderness Camp was surely just a euphemism for Torture Center. I imagined hours of untold abuse at the hands of some lumberjack-sized drill sergeant. I resolved not to be broken and to emerge from the program unchanged. I was who I was. Nearly every day for six months, a small group of other troubled teens and I lugged our 30-pound backpacks on a trek that covered about 10 miles. We hiked in a rugged wilderness that seemed untouched by civilization. The grandeur of the sky, rock and wilderness made me reverent. Our counselors, were firm, but gentle, not the ogres I had imagined. We learned how to make a fire without matches and create a shelter with twigs, branches and grass. We learned which plants were safe to eat out in the wild. Late into the night, we talked about our fears and hopes. We were devoid of radios, televisions and cell phones. I felt myself change. I was calm and often reflective. My old, impulsive self was gone. One morning, six months later, my dad came to pick me up. I ran to hug him and saw relief and love in his eyes.

296 So what s it like being sheriff? I asked on the ride home. I lost the race, Danny, he said. I m sorry, Dad. I knew my behavior probably had a lot to do with his defeat. Dad squeezed my shoulder and brought me close. As long as I don t ever lose you, I m okay. Questions: 1) Which best describes the doublemeaning of the title? A. Danny goes to wilderness camp; it is in a national forest. B. Danny is out of control; he is sent into the wilderness. C. Danny changes at wilderness camp; his father loses a tight race for sheriff. D. Danny hikes in the rugged wilderness; he becomes respectful of nature and others. 2) "I was 16 when my father unequivocally decided that he would send me to wilderness camp for several months." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. I was 16 when my father angrily decided that he would send me to wilderness camp for several months. B. I was 16 when, over the course of several months, my father decided he would send me to wilderness camp. C. I was 16 when my father finally decided that he would send me to wilderness camp for several months. D. I was 16 when my father decided without question that he would send me to wilderness camp for several months. 3) What does the idiomatic expression, "the last straw," suggest? A. the biggest problem of all B. the worst thing someone could have done C. the last in a line of unacceptable occurrences D. the deed someone wishes he or she could take back 4) Which is the best antonym for unbridled? A. amusing B. peaceful C. restrained D. understandable

297 Questions (continued): 5) What lesson did Danny seem to learn in this passage? A. Fight fire with fire. B. Faith will move mountains. C. Nature exceeds nurture. D. A reed before the wind lives on, while mighty oaks do fall. 6) What is a euphemism? A. a code word B. a nickname C. a detailed description D. a less offensive term 7) What kind of character is Jake Hutch in this passage? A. round, meaning fully developed B. protagonist, meaning the main character C. antihero, meaning he lacks heroic traits D. flat, meaning only having enough traits to fulfill his function in the passage 8) "The grandeur of the sky, rock and wilderness made me reverent." Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence. A. I was humbled by the vastness of the sky, rock and wilderness. B. I felt small in comparison to the sheer size of the sky, rock and wilderness. C. The power of the sky, rock and wilderness made me regret my past behavior. D. The inherent danger of the sky, rock and wilderness made me nervous. 9) What is evident by the end of this passage? Check all that are correct. A. how much John loves his son B. how much Danny has changed C. that Danny has made lasting friendships D. that John has given up running for office 10) If the counselors at the wilderness camp had been ogres, how might they have behaved? A. by giving teenagers water only when they were thirsty B. by making the teenagers figure out how to build a fort in the rain C. by refusing to treat the teenagers wounds when they got injured D. by encouraging the teens to socialize with one another even if they didn't want to

298 ReadTheory.Org 2010 EnglishForEveryone.Org 2008 Worth Working For Reading Comprehension Short Stories Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below. Paola and Imran have been married for 8 years. They have had many good times together. They have travelled the world together. They have two little girls together. They have started a chocolate business together. Lately, Paola and Imran have been fighting a lot. Business at the chocolate store is slow. Imran thinks it is Paola s fault. They are having trouble with money. Paola thinks Imran spends too much. One evening, Paola decides to visit her mom for advice. Paola knocks on her mom s door. Paola s mom is happy. It is a surprise visit. She quickly sees, however, that something is wrong. Paola looks sad and tired. Paola, what is the matter? Mom asks. Paola tells her mom all that is going on. Mom smiles gently. She rubs Paola s back. Then she tells Paola a story. Your father and I have a wonderful marriage. But we don t always get along. There was a time when things were very bad between us. We fought all the time. You were just a little girl. One day we watched you playing on the floor. We knew we wanted to make our marriage work. We loved you very much. We loved each other very much. We knew we had to work harder on our marriage. What did you do? asks Paola. We agreed to talk more. We planned a special night each week for the two of us. We went to see someone who helps people with their marriages, Mom says. It was worth it. I can t imagine not having your father in my life. Paola begins to feel better. You are right, she says. What Imran and I have is worth working for. Questions: 1) Why does Paola want to see her mom? A. to have dinner B. to get advice C. to have a laugh D. to see how she is doing 2) Where does the talk take place? A. at Mom's house B. at a restaurant C. at Paola's house D. at the chocolate store

Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in present tense. Example: You / We / They (be) are happy. Example: I (be) am happy.

Using the Verb To be Write the correct form of the verb To be in present tense. Example: You / We / They (be) are happy. Example: I (be) am happy. Exercise 1 Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in present tense. Example: I (be) am happy. 1) I (be) tired. 2) I (be) hungry. 3) I (be) late! Example: He / She / It (be) is happy. Example: You /

More information

Fry Phrases Set 1. TeacherHelpForParents.com help for all areas of your child s education

Fry Phrases Set 1. TeacherHelpForParents.com help for all areas of your child s education Set 1 The people Write it down By the water Who will make it? You and I What will they do? He called me. We had their dog. What did they say? When would you go? No way A number of people One or two How

More information

Fry s Sight Word Phrases

Fry s Sight Word Phrases The people Write it down By the water Who will make it? You and I What will they do? He called me. We had their dog. What did they say? When would you go? No way A number of people One or two How long

More information

Simple Present Tense. Simple Present Tense in the Negative. Grammar Practice Worksheets

Simple Present Tense. Simple Present Tense in the Negative. Grammar Practice Worksheets Simple Present Tense Choose the correct verb from the list below to complete the following sentences. Use the correct form of the simple present tense. fix stand speak drink eat do wear have wash make

More information

PUSD High Frequency Word List

PUSD High Frequency Word List PUSD High Frequency Word List For Reading and Spelling Grades K-5 High Frequency or instant words are important because: 1. You can t read a sentence or a paragraph without knowing at least the most common.

More information

A Note to Parents. 1. As you study the list, vary the order of the words.

A Note to Parents. 1. As you study the list, vary the order of the words. A Note to Parents This Wordbook contains all the sight words we will be studying throughout the year plus some additional enrichment words. Your child should spend some time each week studying this Wordbook

More information

Fast Phrases. - Timed - PHRASES WITH FRY INSTANT WORDS

Fast Phrases. - Timed - PHRASES WITH FRY INSTANT WORDS Fast Phrases - Timed - PHRASES WITH FRY INSTANT WORDS Fry Instant Words are high-frequency words that occur in reading. By practicing reading these phrases containing these words, students can improve

More information

California Treasures High-Frequency Words Scope and Sequence K-3

California Treasures High-Frequency Words Scope and Sequence K-3 California Treasures High-Frequency Words Scope and Sequence K-3 Words were selected using the following established frequency lists: (1) Dolch 220 (2) Fry 100 (3) American Heritage Top 150 Words in English

More information

Chapter. The Weekend

Chapter. The Weekend Chapter 3 The Weekend T he weekend begins on Friday night and ends on Sunday night. Our weekend lives are usually different from our weekday lives. We may relax and have fun. We may also work at weekend

More information

ENGELSKA NIVÅTEST (1) Medel Sid 1(7)

ENGELSKA NIVÅTEST (1) Medel Sid 1(7) Medel Sid 1(7) Namn: Poäng: Nivå : Adress: Tel: Complete each sentence with one item from those given below. Use each item once only. Note: Each question has One mark. You must have all words in the correct

More information

Past Simple & Past Continuous. Exercises

Past Simple & Past Continuous. Exercises Past Simple & Past Continuous Exercises The following document is a brief description and a series of exercises for practicing the past simple and the past continuous in order to improve your knowledge

More information

Would you like to play tennis with me after school, Peter? I can t, Jane. I have to go straight home. How about tomorrow, then?

Would you like to play tennis with me after school, Peter? I can t, Jane. I have to go straight home. How about tomorrow, then? 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 Would you like to play tennis with me after school, Peter? I can t, Jane. I have to go straight home. How about tomorrow, then? 1 We can go today after school. 2 I don t have time today.

More information

TEST DIAGNOSTYCZNY Z JĘZYKA ANGIELSKIEGO

TEST DIAGNOSTYCZNY Z JĘZYKA ANGIELSKIEGO 1. They are the United States. a) to b) for c) from d) with 3. is your favourite colour? a) How b) This c) Who d) What 5. This is my car. a) mother b) mothers c) mother is d) mother's 7. Are these shoes

More information

Box 1 - Article Noun - Blue

Box 1 - Article Noun - Blue the floor a basket the people a broom the igloo the rocks a dog an eagle a bats the leaves a dolphin a triangle the tusks the shoes the book the sky an elephant the ocean a tiger a donkey the shark a cage

More information

SALE TODAY All toys half price

SALE TODAY All toys half price Name: Class: Date: KET Practice PET TestPractice Reading Test and Reading Writing KET PET Part 1 Questions 1 5 Which notice (A H) says this (1 5)? For Questions 1 5 mark the correct letter A H on your

More information

Today, it is spoken in some offices. He's going to study English hard. and talk with a lot of people in the future.

Today, it is spoken in some offices. He's going to study English hard. and talk with a lot of people in the future. Good. How are you? You re welcome. How are you? Oh, no. You mustn t help him. OK. I ll ask him. Why did you finish the report? You can t buy a dictionary. No, thank you. How are you? It s cloudy. How are

More information

5.7 Nominative Case and Objective Case Pronouns

5.7 Nominative Case and Objective Case Pronouns Chapter 5 Usage of Verbs, Pronouns, & Modifiers 171 5.7 Nominative Case and Objective Case Pronouns Personal pronouns have three cases: nominative, objective, and possessive (See lesson 1.4). The way a

More information

EKOLA Junior High School Bilingual Programme Entrance Test (1h15) Sample Paper. Result:

EKOLA Junior High School Bilingual Programme Entrance Test (1h15) Sample Paper. Result: EKOLA Junior High School Bilingual Programme Entrance Test (1h15) Sample Paper Name: Result: Task 1 Which notice says what? For questions 1 5, match the correct letter A H. 1. You do not have to pay extra

More information

A) Complete the sentences with SIMPLE PRESENT or PRESENT CONTINUOUS.

A) Complete the sentences with SIMPLE PRESENT or PRESENT CONTINUOUS. ŠESTI RAZRED A) Complete the sentences with SIMPLE PRESENT or PRESENT CONTINUOUS. 1. Susan usually. (go) to school by bus, but now she.. (go) to school by train. 2. Mary often.. (read) in bed, but today

More information

Chapter 3 Growing with Verbs 77

Chapter 3 Growing with Verbs 77 Chapter 3 Growing with Verbs 77 3.2 Direct Objects A direct object is the noun or pronoun that receives the direct action of a verb. The verb used with a direct object is always an action verb and is called

More information

Contents: 2008 www.perfect-english-grammar.com May be freely copied for personal or classroom use.

Contents: 2008 www.perfect-english-grammar.com May be freely copied for personal or classroom use. 2 Contents: Grammar of phrasal verbs 2 Deal with 3 Come across 5 Get on with 7 Look after 9 Pick up 11 Review 1 13 Put on 14 Take off 16 Look into 18 Turn down 20 Look forward to 22 Review 2 23 Answers

More information

Name ID number: Date:

Name ID number: Date: UNIVERSIDAD AUTÓNOMA DE NUEVO LEÓN Escuela Industrial y Prepa Técnica Pablo Livas Laboratorio de 3ra y 5ta op. de Inglés 2 Academia de inglés centro Semestre agosto-diciembre 2016 Name ID number: Date:

More information

Adverbs of Manner My mom speaks English poorly. He plays volley ball well. You eat food so slowly.

Adverbs of Manner My mom speaks English poorly. He plays volley ball well. You eat food so slowly. Adverbs of Manner My mom speaks English poorly. He plays volley ball well. You eat food so slowly. Why do we use adverbs? [FUNCTION] To describe a verb They are studying quietly. ( quietly describes the

More information

Lucy enjoyed playing football, especially when James asked her to take part. When she was standing next to her brother, Anita looked very tall.

Lucy enjoyed playing football, especially when James asked her to take part. When she was standing next to her brother, Anita looked very tall. www.compare4kids.co.uk Question Sheet Past Paper 2013 Level 3-5 Question 34 1 Underline the subordinate clause in each sentence below. Lucy enjoyed playing football, especially when James asked her to

More information

Ohio s Assessment System

Ohio s Assessment System hio Department of Education Student Name: Ohio s Assessment System Grade 2 Reading Student Booklet Form A Diagnostic Measure 3rd Edition Office of Curriculum and Assessment Copyright 2012 by the Ohio Department

More information

7.5 Emphatic Verb Tense

7.5 Emphatic Verb Tense Chapter 7 Verb Usage 211 7.5 Emphatic Verb Tense The emphatic tenses of a verb are used to add emphasis. In addition, the emphatic tense can be used with the word not in negative sentences and to form

More information

Interview Questions for Secondary Schools Interviews

Interview Questions for Secondary Schools Interviews Interview Questions for Secondary Schools Interviews PART I 1. What is your name? My name is Lu Kin Tsang. My English name is Donald. 2. How old are you? I am twelve years old. 3. Where were you born?

More information

PHRASAL VERBS INTRODUCTION. The Òsmall wordsó in phrasal verbs are important, because they completely change the meaning.

PHRASAL VERBS INTRODUCTION. The Òsmall wordsó in phrasal verbs are important, because they completely change the meaning. PHRASAL VERBS INTRODUCTION Phrasal verbs have two parts: a verb (e.g.: put, take, get, give, go, etc) and one or sometimes two "small words" (e.g.: on, up, out, in, etc) which go with the verb. Compare:

More information

Trip to Kristiansund - Norway

Trip to Kristiansund - Norway Trip to Kristiansund - Norway Sophia, Nico and Vincent from Germany Thursday, 20.09.2012 This is my story of the unforgettable days in Kristiansund, Norway. We went from our hometown Mering with the train

More information

Phonics. High Frequency Words P.008. Objective The student will read high frequency words.

Phonics. High Frequency Words P.008. Objective The student will read high frequency words. P.008 Jumping Words Objective The student will read high frequency words. Materials High frequency words (P.HFW.005 - P.HFW.064) Choose target words. Checkerboard and checkers (Activity Master P.008.AM1a

More information

Making Inferences Picture #1

Making Inferences Picture #1 Making Inferences Picture #1 Casey and Josie are standing in front of East Moore Middle School. Making Inferences Picture #2 Sue surprised her friend with a gift. Making Inferences Picture #3 Angela isn

More information

Verb To Be Past Tense Affirmative and Negative

Verb To Be Past Tense Affirmative and Negative Verb To Be Past Tense Affirmative and Negative A. Put the correct form of the verb to be (was/were) in the past tense in the following sentences. 1. Judy sick yesterday. 2. We in the same class last year.

More information

That spring, the sun shone every day. I was lonely at first in

That spring, the sun shone every day. I was lonely at first in 1 Tom and Daisy That spring, the sun shone every day. I was lonely at first in the East. But I felt that this was the real beginning of my life. I walked in the fresh air. I bought books. I worked hard.

More information

S OAPY MOVED RESTLESSLY ON HIS SEAT

S OAPY MOVED RESTLESSLY ON HIS SEAT T h e C o p a n d t h e A n t h e m p The Cop and the Anthem S OAPY MOVED RESTLESSLY ON HIS SEAT in Madison Square. There are certain signs to show that winter is coming. Birds begin to fly south. Women

More information

A test based on the grammar-grade one

A test based on the grammar-grade one A test based on the grammar-grade one Choose the correct option for these comparative and superlative adjective sentences. 1. I am my brother. a) taller than b) the tallest 2. She is student in her class.

More information

Tom had 5 toy cars. His dad gave him 3 more toy cars. How many toy cars did Tom have in all?

Tom had 5 toy cars. His dad gave him 3 more toy cars. How many toy cars did Tom have in all? How many and in all? How many more than? How many are left? Tom had 5 toy cars. His dad gave him 3 more toy cars. How many toy cars did Tom have in all? 7 birds were in a tree. 2 more birds flew to the

More information

NO LONGER THE FIRST 2010 Josh Danz

NO LONGER THE FIRST 2010 Josh Danz NO LONGER THE FIRST 2010 Josh Danz Free performance of this play for high school and college level competitive forensics is permitted. All other rights reserved. The Intriguing Interp Series is published

More information

Chapter 3 - Growing with Verbs. A verb that helps another verb is called a helping verb. It comes before the main verb to tell about the action.

Chapter 3 - Growing with Verbs. A verb that helps another verb is called a helping verb. It comes before the main verb to tell about the action. 120 Chapter 3 - Growing with Verbs 3.12 Helping Verbs A verb that helps another verb is called a helping verb. It comes before the main verb to tell about the action. John will ride his scooter. She has

More information

1 Grammar in the Real World

1 Grammar in the Real World U NIT 31 Adjectives and Adverbs Making a Good Impression 1 Grammar in the Real World A Do you know how to give a presentation? What do you do to prepare? Read the article How many of your ideas are in

More information

Movers Reading & Writing

Movers Reading & Writing Page 28 Movers Cambridge Young Learners English Tests Part 1 6 questions Look and read. Choose the correct words and write them on the lines. a whale coffee a shoulder an elephant soup a stomach milk a

More information

Most Common Words Transfer Card: List 1

Most Common Words Transfer Card: List 1 Most Common Words Transfer Card: List 1 the to a and in you that of it not for I is an Meg is in the bed. That is not for you. It is in a bag. I am not mad. Most Common Words Transfer Card: List 2 on with

More information

Class 4 Poetry 2008. Forever. Killer Lightning!! Lightning is dangerous so Keep Away!! By Gregory

Class 4 Poetry 2008. Forever. Killer Lightning!! Lightning is dangerous so Keep Away!! By Gregory Class 4 Poetry 2008 Forever I went through A golden gate, A silver gate, A mother of pearl gate. Until I found a path, I followed it to I do not know where, But I ve followed it there, Through tangled

More information

Participle. 國 中 英 語 自 助 餐 http://210.240.55.2/~t311/moe/engb5/b5grammar/b5participle.htm

Participle. 國 中 英 語 自 助 餐 http://210.240.55.2/~t311/moe/engb5/b5grammar/b5participle.htm Participle 國 中 英 語 自 助 餐 http://210.240.55.2/~t311/moe/engb5/b5grammar/b5participle.htm Basic 1. Chuck: Did you watch the tennis game between our school and Wanlai Junior High School yesterday? It was

More information

LITTLE RED RIDING-HOOD

LITTLE RED RIDING-HOOD LITTLE RED RIDING-HOOD Little Red Riding-Hood Mother Bird Wolf CAST OF CHARACTERS SETTINGS Little Red Riding-Hood s Home The Wood Grandmother s House Mr. Miller Grandmother Wood Choppers Scene I. At Red

More information

- ENGLISH TEST - ELEMENTARY 100 QUESTIONS

- ENGLISH TEST - ELEMENTARY 100 QUESTIONS Exercise 1: Tick (P) the suitable answer. - ENGLISH TEST - 1. My brother... a flat in London. A have B has C haves 2.... you live with your boyfriend? A Do B Does C Is 3. Elizabeth is.... A Philip's wife

More information

Our Important Book. based on The Important Book by Margaret Wise Brown

Our Important Book. based on The Important Book by Margaret Wise Brown Our Important Book based on The Important Book by Margaret Wise Brown A Project SAIL Publication 2005 ~ 2006 The important thing about a video game is that is that it is fun to play. Some games have wireless

More information

A. Short Comprehension The candidate is expected to demonstrate the ability to understand the passage (around 70 words) and answer the questions.

A. Short Comprehension The candidate is expected to demonstrate the ability to understand the passage (around 70 words) and answer the questions. LTTC - English Grammar Proficiency Test Grade 3 A. Short Comprehension The candidate is expected to demonstrate the ability to understand the passage (around 70 words) and answer the questions. B. Usage

More information

1 I... swim well when I was very young. A can B could C knew. 3 What... on Sundays? A does Mary usually do B does Mary usually

1 I... swim well when I was very young. A can B could C knew. 3 What... on Sundays? A does Mary usually do B does Mary usually Test 2A 1 I... swim well when I was very young. A can B could C knew 2 When I got... I had a bath. A home B at home C to home 3 What... on Sundays? A does Mary usually do B does Mary usually C usually

More information

DIAGNOSTIC EVALUATION

DIAGNOSTIC EVALUATION Servicio de Inspección Educativa Hezkuntzako Ikuskapen Zerbitzua 2 0 1 1 / 1 2 DIAGNOSTIC EVALUATION 4th YEAR of PRIMARY EDUCATION ENGLISH LITERACY Name / surname(s):... School:... Group:... City / Town:.

More information

Regular Verbs Simple Present and Simple Past Tenses

Regular Verbs Simple Present and Simple Past Tenses Regular Verbs Simple Present and Simple Past Tenses This is a list of Regular Verbs. These verbs use -ed for the simple past tense. The ed ending sounds like /d/ I will read the base form and the simple

More information

1. Listen to your teacher read the vocabulary words.

1. Listen to your teacher read the vocabulary words. Lesson 6 Literature Link 1. Listen to your teacher read the vocabulary words. Vocabulary Tilda Tennessee troublemaker chicken visitors special invited outwit enough bridle saddle reins different comfortable

More information

Regular Verbs Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses

Regular Verbs Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses Regular Verbs Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses This is a list of Regular Verbs. These verbs use -ed for the simple past tense and the past participle. The ed ending sounds like /t/

More information

First Grade Spelling Words

First Grade Spelling Words First Grade Spelling Words The Hat 1. at 2. hat 3. cat 4. can 5. cap 6. tap 7. map 8. mad 9. a 10. the I tap the can. Sam and the Bag 1. am 2. ham 3. had 4. bad 5. bag 6. rag 7. cap 8. mad 9. up 10. go

More information

Present Perfect Progressive (Present Perfect Continuous)

Present Perfect Progressive (Present Perfect Continuous) (Present Perfect Continuous) Read the situations below and write a sentence using the present perfect progressive tense to say how long the situation has been happening. For & Since Ex. The baby is crying.

More information

Conditional Sentences Third Condition (Past Time - Unreal/ Contrary to Fact)

Conditional Sentences Third Condition (Past Time - Unreal/ Contrary to Fact) Conditional Sentences Third Condition (Past Time - Unreal/ Contrary to Fact) Complete the following sentences using the correct form of the verbs provided. Ex. Annie failed her history test, but if she

More information

2nd Grade Language Arts Practice Test

2nd Grade Language Arts Practice Test 2nd Grade Language Arts Practice Name: Instructions: Copyright 2000-2002 Measured Progress, All Rights Reserved : 1. Which word in the paragraph below is used too much? My music teacher is nice. He plays

More information

Jahresabschlusstest 1

Jahresabschlusstest 1 Jahresabschlusstest 1 Let s simply continue Please fill in the gaps with either the simple present or the present continuous forms of the verb in brackets. 1. Samantha usually (drink) a cup of coffee in

More information

FACOLTÀ TEOLOGICA DELL EMILIA-ROMAGNA TEST DI INGLESE

FACOLTÀ TEOLOGICA DELL EMILIA-ROMAGNA TEST DI INGLESE Cognome Nome Corso di studi data FACOLTÀ TEOLOGICA DELL EMILIA-ROMAGNA TEST DI INGLESE LIVELLO 0 (Beginners - A1). 1 I am Susan. 2 He are my friend. 3 What does "food" mean? Something to drink. Something

More information

REPORTED SPEECH. Reported speech is used to retell or report what other person has actually said. It is a very usual function in everyday language.

REPORTED SPEECH. Reported speech is used to retell or report what other person has actually said. It is a very usual function in everyday language. REPORTED SPEECH USE Reported speech is used to retell or report what other person has actually said. It is a very usual function in everyday language. STRUCTURE Formal aspects We can find different ways

More information

銘 傳 大 學 九 十 一 學 年 度 轉 學 生 招 生 考 試 八 月 四 日 第 四 節 應 英 轉 三 英 文 聽 力 試 題

銘 傳 大 學 九 十 一 學 年 度 轉 學 生 招 生 考 試 八 月 四 日 第 四 節 應 英 轉 三 英 文 聽 力 試 題 銘 傳 大 學 九 十 一 學 年 度 轉 學 生 招 生 考 試 八 月 四 日 第 四 節 應 英 轉 三 英 文 聽 力 試 題 Part A Medium Dialogue Dialogue 1. 1. a. in the night market b. in a supermarket c. in a 7-11 d. in an electronics store 2. a. She is

More information

LESSON TITLE: Jesus Visits Mary and Martha THEME: Jesus wants us to spend time with \ Him. SCRIPTURE: Luke 10:38-42

LESSON TITLE: Jesus Visits Mary and Martha THEME: Jesus wants us to spend time with \ Him. SCRIPTURE: Luke 10:38-42 Devotion NT249 CHILDREN S DEVOTIONS FOR THE WEEK OF: LESSON TITLE: Jesus Visits Mary and Martha THEME: Jesus wants us to spend time with \ Him. SCRIPTURE: Luke 10:38-42 Dear Parents Welcome to Bible Time

More information

Grammar Academic Review

Grammar Academic Review Name Grammar Academic Review s Hour s are used in place of nouns. s can be singular or plural. I you he she it they we me him her them us Isaac is in the bad. He is in the band. Connor and Brook like to

More information

ENGLISH FILE. End-of-course Test. New. Beginner. 1 Complete the sentences with one word.

ENGLISH FILE. End-of-course Test. New. Beginner. 1 Complete the sentences with one word. End-of-course Test GRAMMAR 1 Complete the sentences with one word. Example: A Are you Simon? B Yes, I am. 1 A Where Sally from? B She s from Ireland. 2 A Are they French? B No, they. They re Italian. 3

More information

Nouns are naming words - they are used to name a person, place or thing.

Nouns are naming words - they are used to name a person, place or thing. Adjectives Adjectives are describing words - they tell you more about nouns. Nouns are naming words - they are used to name a person, place or thing. Adjectives tell you more about the noun. Using adjectives

More information

Grammar and Mechanics Test 3

Grammar and Mechanics Test 3 Grammar and Mechanics 3 Name: Instructions: Copyright 2000-2002 Measured Progress, All Rights Reserved : Grammar and Mechanics 3 1. Which sentence is missing punctuation? A. My best friend was born on

More information

Compound- Complex Sentences

Compound- Complex Sentences Compound- Complex Sentences 40 Task Cards Plus Grammar Posters By Classroom Core Grades 6 8 Aligned to CCSS 40 Task Cards Storage Case Template 3 Grammar Posters Student Recording Sheet Instructions &

More information

The Story of Ruby Bridges

The Story of Ruby Bridges The Story of Ruby Bridges Our Ruby taught us all a lot. She became someone who helped change our country. She was part of history, just like generals and presidents are part of history. They re leaders,

More information

One Day. Helen Naylor. ... Level 2. Series editor: Philip Prowse. Cambridge University Press 978-0-521-71422-8 - One Day.

One Day. Helen Naylor. ... Level 2. Series editor: Philip Prowse. Cambridge University Press 978-0-521-71422-8 - One Day. Cambridge English Readers... Level 2 Series editor: Philip Prowse One Day cambridge university press Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo, Delhi Cambridge University

More information

2011-2012 PRESCHOOL WORSHIP SONGS

2011-2012 PRESCHOOL WORSHIP SONGS 2011-2012 PRESCHOOL WORSHIP SONGS ALL MY HEART I wanna love you, God With all my heart With all my heart I wanna love you, God with all my heart (whistling) I wanna love you, God Like Jesus did Like Jesus

More information

Nombre: I am not playing. You are not (you aren t) eating. He is not (He isn t) reading. She is not (She isn t) sleeping.

Nombre: I am not playing. You are not (you aren t) eating. He is not (He isn t) reading. She is not (She isn t) sleeping. PRESENT CONTINUOUS Affirmative Negative Interrogative I am (I m) playing. You are (you re) eating He is (He s) reading. She is (She s) sleeping. It is (It s) running. We are (we re) speaking. You are (you

More information

Nombre: I am not playing. You are not (you aren t) eating. He is not (He isn t) reading. She is not (She isn t) sleeping.

Nombre: I am not playing. You are not (you aren t) eating. He is not (He isn t) reading. She is not (She isn t) sleeping. PRESENT CONTINUOUS Affirmative Negative Interrogative I am (I m) playing. You are (you re) eating He is (He s) reading. She is (She s) sleeping. It is (It s) running. We are (we re) speaking. You are (you

More information

Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses

Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses Simple Present, Simple Past and Present Perfect Tenses This is a list of. I will read the base form, the simple past tense and the past participle of the verb. Then, I will read the verb in three sentences,

More information

[elo'quia. S 1 / 6. Please mark the correct answer with a X. Example: I must my homework this evening. X. Duration: 45 minutes.

[elo'quia. S 1 / 6. Please mark the correct answer with a X. Example: I must my homework this evening. X. Duration: 45 minutes. [elo'quia. English test ] Duration: 45 minutes Family name First name Date Please mark the correct answer with a X. Example: I must my homework this evening. X do to make to do make 1] What do you do?

More information

ONE DOLLAR AND EIGHTY-SEVEN CENTS.

ONE DOLLAR AND EIGHTY-SEVEN CENTS. T h e G i f t o f t h e M a g i p T h e G i f t o f t h e M a g i ONE DOLLAR AND EIGHTY-SEVEN CENTS. That was all. She had put it aside, one cent and then another and then another, in her careful buying

More information

First Grade Spelling 3-1. First Grade Spelling. 1. an 2. at 3. can 4. cat 5. had 6. man 7. I 8. and 9. the 10. a. Dictation Sentences:

First Grade Spelling 3-1. First Grade Spelling. 1. an 2. at 3. can 4. cat 5. had 6. man 7. I 8. and 9. the 10. a. Dictation Sentences: First Grade Spelling Dear Parents, Beginning this week, the first graders will be starting their spelling program. Each Monday, or the beginning of the week, they will be given a pre-test on 10 words that

More information

始 まりのブザーが 鳴 るまでページをめくってはいけません

始 まりのブザーが 鳴 るまでページをめくってはいけません 2013 年 度 青 山 学 院 高 等 部 一 般 入 学 試 験 問 題 英 語 始 まりのブザーが 鳴 るまでページをめくってはいけません 下 記 の 注 意 事 項 に 目 を 通 しておいてください 問 題 用 紙 は 1 ページから 12 ページまであるので 始 まりのブザー が 鳴 ったらすぐに 確 認 すること 解 答 はすべて 別 紙 の 解 答 用 紙 に 記 入 すること とじてある

More information

B.A. ENGLISH ENTRANCE TEST

B.A. ENGLISH ENTRANCE TEST B.A. ENGLISH ENTRANCE TEST Time allowed: 60 min Total marks for the test: 100 Marking scheme: 1 mark for each correct answer In each multiple choice question, only one of the four answers is correct. Choose

More information

WWW.MRSCARRION.WEBS.COM. First Grade High Frequency /Spelling Words

WWW.MRSCARRION.WEBS.COM. First Grade High Frequency /Spelling Words WWW.MRSCARRION.WEBS.COM Name: First Grade High Frequency /Spelling Words Indicate Words that become decodable and are included in blending lines and word work for that week. 1. can 2. I 3. we 4. like 5.

More information

Marty's Big Mistake A short story about character by Wes Fessler Marty mouse was walking home from school one sunny day. A rock was on the sidewalk, which he kicked along the way. The rock would bounce

More information

THE WASHING MACHINE. Written by. Lorena Padilla

THE WASHING MACHINE. Written by. Lorena Padilla THE WASHING MACHINE Written by Lorena Padilla lorepadilla78@gmail.com INT. DINING ROOM - DAY A very messy dining room. There are empty beer bottles and ashtrays with cigarettes on the table. (12) cleans

More information

Parents Corner. Habit 1 Be ProActive * You re In Charge

Parents Corner. Habit 1 Be ProActive * You re In Charge Habit 1 Be ProActive * You re In Charge I can t count how many times my kids have whined, Dad, we re so bored! There s nothing to do, as if their boredom was somehow my fault I ll respond with something

More information

Sunflowers. Name. Level and grade. PrimaryTools.co.uk

Sunflowers. Name. Level and grade. PrimaryTools.co.uk Sunflowers Name Score Level and grade 2012 Contents Billy s Sunflower... 3 A story by Nicola Moon So Many Sunflowers!... 14 Vincent Van Gogh... 15 Information about the artist Making a Paper Sunflower...

More information

Part 1 LISTENING. Task 1

Part 1 LISTENING. Task 1 Part 1 LISTENING Task 1 Listen to Joel telling his elder sister about his friends. Where would they like to work one day? For questions 1-5, write a letter -H next to each person. You will hear the conversation

More information

Entry test B1. Grammar Vocabulary Communication. Test di ingresso - classe III. Nome e cognome... Classe... Data...

Entry test B1. Grammar Vocabulary Communication. Test di ingresso - classe III. Nome e cognome... Classe... Data... Test di ingresso - classe III Entry test B1 Grammar Vocabulary Communication Nome e cognome... Classe.........................................................................................................................................................................................

More information

LTTC English Grammar Proficiency Test Grade 2

LTTC English Grammar Proficiency Test Grade 2 LTTC English Grammar Proficiency Test Grade 2 A. Short Comprehension The candidate is expected to demonstrate the ability to understand the passage (around 50 words) and answer the questions. B. Usage

More information

The Test of Critical Thinking Student Instructions

The Test of Critical Thinking Student Instructions TCT - 1 The Test of Critical Thinking Student Instructions Today, you are going to take a test called The Test of Critical Thinking. How well you do on this test will not affect your grade in this class.

More information

Identifying the Meaning of Common Idioms, Adages, & Other Sayings 1/5 1/23 3 weeks

Identifying the Meaning of Common Idioms, Adages, & Other Sayings 1/5 1/23 3 weeks Identifying the Meaning of Common Idioms, Adages, & Other Sayings 1/5 1/23 3 weeks TEKS 5.2D/Fig 19D Lesson Time Frame Focus Lesson 18 1/5 1/9 Understanding Common Idioms and Adages Lesson 19 1/12-1/16

More information

More Multi Step Problems. Miscellaneous Themes

More Multi Step Problems. Miscellaneous Themes More Multi Step Problems Miscellaneous Themes Jelly beans cost $2.00 for 4 packages. There were 25 students. How much money will be needed so that each student can get an equal amount of jellybeans? How

More information

Kangourou Italia - British Institutes Gara del 2 marzo 2010 Categoria Joey Per studenti della classe quinta della Scuola Primaria

Kangourou Italia - British Institutes Gara del 2 marzo 2010 Categoria Joey Per studenti della classe quinta della Scuola Primaria Testi_Kang_10ENG.qxp 8-01-2010 22:38 Pagina 5 Kangourou Italia - British Institutes Gara del 2 marzo 2010 Categoria Per studenti della classe quinta della Scuola Primaria Choose the correct alternative

More information

That's the Way I Like It

That's the Way I Like It That's the Way I Like It Written, designed and set up by: Pat Neuman Illustrated by: Margie Hildebrand A book project of: Pembina Valley Learning Centre Funded by: The National Literacy Secretariat 2005

More information

ICN Sharing Page TEACH US, AMELIA BEDELIA By Peggy Parish

ICN Sharing Page TEACH US, AMELIA BEDELIA By Peggy Parish ICN Sharing Page TEACH US, AMELIA BEDELIA By Peggy Parish Setting Characters Where did the story take place? How did the story move from one setting to another? Who are the main characters? How do they

More information

Entry Exam 2016 in English

Entry Exam 2016 in English Entry Exam 2016 in English Family Name: First Name: Present School: Duration: 50 minutes Your are not allowed to use pencil. Use a pen! You may leave early. (When finished, turn your test upside down and

More information

FORM 5 ENGLISH TIME: 15 minutes Listening Comprehension. Instructions for the conduct of the Listening Comprehension Examination

FORM 5 ENGLISH TIME: 15 minutes Listening Comprehension. Instructions for the conduct of the Listening Comprehension Examination DIRECTORATE FOR QUALITY AND STANDARDS IN EDUCATION Department for Curriculum Management and elearning Educational Assessment Unit Annual Examinations for Secondary Schools 2011 Track 1 FORM 5 ENGLISH TIME:

More information

Past Simple Negatives & Wh- Questions

Past Simple Negatives & Wh- Questions Past Simple Negatives & Wh- Questions Past Simple Positive Statements [Subject + Past Simple] [1] I bought a new shirt. [2] He walked to school today. [3] They went to Japan. [4] We studied in the library.

More information

What did Eri s brass band do in the park last fall? Her brass band there last fall.

What did Eri s brass band do in the park last fall? Her brass band there last fall. 28 60 Sunny. Cloudy and cold. On Saturday morning. On Sunday morning. A red hat and a white bag. A red bag and a white hat. Rainy. Cloudy and warm. On Saturday afternoon. On Sunday afternoon. A blue bag

More information

Mammon and the Archer

Mammon and the Archer O. H e n r y p Mammon and the Archer OLD ANTHONY ROCKWALL, WHO HAD MADE millions of dollars by making and selling Rockwall s soap, stood at a window of his large Fifth Avenue house. He was looking out

More information

Eat & Drink. It s time to eat, eat, eat What a treat Eat, eat, EAT I m all done now I wash it down with my favorite drink DRINK!

Eat & Drink. It s time to eat, eat, eat What a treat Eat, eat, EAT I m all done now I wash it down with my favorite drink DRINK! Eat & Drink It s time to eat, eat, eat What a treat Eat, eat, EAT I m all done now I wash it down with my favorite drink DRINK! It s time to eat, eat, eat What a treat Eat, eat CRACKERS I m all done now

More information

Andrew T. Hill, Ph.D., Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia

Andrew T. Hill, Ph.D., Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia By Peter H. Reynolds/ISBN: 076362623-6 Lesson by: Andrew T. Hill, Ph.D., Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia Lesson Description In this lesson, students learn about scarcity, alternatives, choices and

More information